Annex - A - Technical Specifications - RFSL PDF

ANNEX -A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Table of Contents
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS -----------------------------------------PAGE 1 - 42
B. SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURNITURE WORKS ------------------PAGE 43 - 50
C. SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS --------------------------- PAGE 51-128
D. SPECIFICATIONS FOR SANITARY & ELECTRICAL WORKS-----PAGE 129-183

A- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Table of Contents
Section GR-010: Scope of the Work ---------------------------------------------------------------------Page 1
Section GR-020: Employer Supplied Data and Information -------------------------------------Page 2-3
Section GR-030: Access, Transportation and Storage ------------------------------------------- Page 4-5
Section GR-040: Site Facilities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 6-7
Section GR-050: Contractor’s Submittals--------------------------------------------------------------Page 8-12
Section GR-060: Pre-construction Works -------------------------------------------------------------Page 13-14
Section GR-070: Layout of Work and Survey --------------------------------------------------------Page 15-16
Section GR-080: Quality Control -------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 17-22
Section GR-090: Health and Safety ----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 23-35

Section GR-100: Environmental Control ---------------------------------------------------------------Page 36-39
Section GR-110: Site Meetings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 40

Section GR-120: Demobilization --------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 41- 42
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S S E CT I ON G R- 0 1 0
SCOPE OF WORK
1. INTRODUCTION
UNOPS wishes to engage the services of a contractor for implementation and completion of
various works of Refurbishment of Central Forensic Science Laboratory of Nepal Police at
Samakhushi, Kathmandu, Nepal.
There are internal work and external work under this scope of the work. The internal work covers
the works inside the buildings especially related to furnishing with lab working tables, chemical
storage cabinets, filing cabinets, office tables, chairs etc., partition works and the external work
covers the works related to compound fencing, internal fencing, compound gate, pavement works
and landscaping works.
All the work shall be in accordance with this scope of work, approved plans, specifications of
work, general conditions, and other related documents as indicated in the bidding documents,
unless otherwise stated.
2. SCOPE OF WORK (GENERAL)
The work in this contract shall include but not limited to the furnishing of all necessary tools,
materials, equipment, skilled manpower, transportation, machineries, accessories, site engineers
and supervisors to carry out all work as described below and as outlined in the Bill Of Quantity,
drawings and other accompanying documents unless otherwise stated.
Extend of Work:
The work to be carried out as part of SOW shall involve but not be limited to:
1. Mobilization and Demobilization.
2. Furniture fabrication and supply
3. On site lab working table fabrication and installation
4. Demolition activities
5. Floor tiling works
6. Aluminum partition works and aluminum doors
7. Chain link and barbed fencing works
8. Interlocking concrete pavement works and landscaping
9. Compound gate fabrication and installation
10. Surface drain and recharge well construction
All the work shall be carried as per the terms and condition of the contract in accordance to the
specification and drawing provided.
GR-0 10-1
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S E MP L O Y E R S U P P L I E D D AT A A N D I N F O R M AT I O N
EMPLOYER-SUPPLIED DATA AND INFORMATION
1. GENERAL
This Section covers the directions for use of project-related data and information, such
as drawings and specifications, provided by the Employer to the Contractor at various
stages of the project.
2. DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
1. The drawings enclosed with the Tender Documents show the general arrangement
and main dimensions of the project structures. During the progress of the work,
additional construction drawings will be issued by the Engineer, as necessary, to set
forth details shown on the drawings issued to the Contractor at award of the
Contract. Such additional drawings shall become part of the Contract.
2. The Contractor shall be governed by figured dimensions given on the drawings.
When required dimensions are not shown on the construction drawings, the
Contractor shall obtain such dimensions from the Engineer before proceeding with
the construction of the portion of the work to which they refer. In every case,
construction drawings shall take precedence over tender drawings.
3. Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other so that, if
anything is shown on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice
versa, it is to be followed and built as though specifically set forth in both.
4. If drawings conflict with specifications in any particular way, the specifications shall
govern.
5. The Engineer may, from time to time, issue additional detailed drawings,
specifications and instructions for the performance of the work and, upon issue,
such shall be deemed incorporated in the Contract. The Contractor shall
immediately review such drawings and promptly inform the Engineer of any errors,
discrepancies or conflict with other parts of the Contract before proceeding with the
work.
6. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep at least one copy of the drawings and
specifications in proper binding and filing for format at each project site. Such
drawings must be the latest revised issue and must bear the Engineer’s “Issued for
Construction” label.
7. All drawings and specifications and copies thereof, furnished by the Engineer, shall
remain the Employer’s property and are not to be copied/Xeroxed and used on other
works.
3. PATENTED MATERIALS
Whenever any material is specified in the Specifications or on the Drawings by patent or

proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specifications shall be
considered as used for the purpose of describing the material desired and the degree of
excellence required and shall be considered as if followed by the words or approval
equivalent, whether or not such words appear.
4. STANDARDS, CODES OR DESIGNATIONS
Unless specifically provided otherwise, all references in the Contract to standards,

codes or designations shall refer to the latest edition of the publication on the date of the
submission of the tender.
GR - 0 20 - 2
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S E M P L O Y E R S U P P L I E D D A T A AN D I N F O R MA T I O N
5. COSTS
The Contractor will receive, free of charge, one print of each construction drawing, one
copy of each revised drawing and one copy of the specifications. However, the
Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, at no additional cost to the Employer,
additional copies of drawings and specifications, or necessary portions thereof, to its
own personnel, sub-contractors and material suppliers, as required.
GR-0 20-3
S EC T I ON GR - 0 30
ACCESS, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
1. ACCESS
The project sites under this package are located at various locations of the district to
which the package relates. These sites are accessible from the all-weather or graveled
link roads that takeoff from various points of the East-West Highway.
2. TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIALS
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the transportation of all materials from the
point of manufacture or supply to storage areas or directly to the Site.
2. The Contractor shall investigate and respect the size and weight limitations along
the transportation routes. He shall allow for all costs of transportation in his Contract
Price.
3. The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the roads or
bridges on the routes to the Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the
Contractor or any of his sub-contractor.
4. If any damage occurs to any bridge or road arising from the transport of materials or
Plant, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, as soon
as he becomes aware of such damage or as soon as he receives any claim from
such authority entitled to make such claim.
5. The Contractor shall indemnify the road authority against damage. The Employer
shall not be liable for any costs, charges or expenses in respect thereof or in relation
thereto.
6. The Contractor shall bear the risk of loss or damage to all materials, equipment,
plant etc. prior to acceptance by the Employer.
3. PACKAGING AND SHIPPING
7. The Contractor shall wrap, pack and crate all materials and Plant included in the
Works or part thereof, suitable for shipment according to the site climatic conditions,
and in a manner which facilitates handling and protects the material or Plant from
damage in rail, truck, ocean or air shipment as applicable, and within the size and
weight limitations imposed by the carrier. An approved drying agent, such as silica
gel, shall be packed in containers or packages holding materials and Plant that may
be adversely affected by moisture or excessive humidity. The Contractor shall check
right of way clearances and weight limitations and make all shipping arrangements.
Plant and material shall be shipped in proper sequence for efficient installation.
8. All Plant parts shall be marked to facilitate erection. All packing crates shall be
clearly and indelibly marked before shipping to indicate the Contract number and
shipping address, volume, weight, name, number and unit number of the contents,
slinging and weight bearing points.
9. Each packing crate shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope. Three
copies of the packing list shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to dispatch. Parts
shall be described and also identified by their numbered markings in the packing
lists. All shipping documents shall be prepared in English and all dimensions,
weights and other measurement shall be given in metric units.
GR - 0 30 - 4
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S A C C E S S T R AN S P O R T AT I O N A N D S T O R A G E
10. Each package shall be marked with the Employer’s identification mark, details of
which will be provided by the Employer after order to commence the works.
4. SITE HANDLING AND STORAGE
1. The Contractor shall ensure that all material and Plant shall be protected during site
handling and storage against loss, corrosion, weather damage, deformation or
distortion and contamination by dirt.
2. Part on which the final alignment and running clearances of the equipment depend
shall be adequately blocked and protected to prevent distortion during storage,
handling and erection.
3. If the equipment is received at the Site before it is to be erected, the Contractor shall
store the equipment as packed, in a clean and well-protected place.
4. Installed plant shall be covered with clean tarpaulins and tied shot to prevent ingress
of dust and dirt during construction, as required by the Engineer.
5. For the duration of the Works on Site, the Contractor shall provide covered storage
facilities, weatherproof shelters, loading and unloading facilities as required for the
material and Plant.
6. All deliveries of materials and Plant shall be checked and discrepancies noted and
reported in writing to the Engineer. Lost items shall be replaced. Damaged items
shall be replaced (or repaired if permitted by the Engineer) to conform to the
Specifications.
GR-0 30-5
SITE FACILITIES
1. OFFICE, LUNCHROOM AND RESIDENTIAL FACILITIES
During the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable
site office and lunchroom facilities for the use of the Contractor and its sub-contractors.
He shall arrange accommodation for its and its sub-contractor’s staff outside of the
project premises. The locations of such facilities shall be subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
2. PARKING FACILITIES
A parking area for the vehicles of the Contractor, sub-contractors and their employees
shall be provided by the Contractor outside the project work area as authorized by the
Engineer. No private vehicles will be allowed on site.
3. CONSTRUCTION POWER
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for construction power supply. He
shall be required to provide a construction power distribution system, including all step-
down transformers, poles, cables and other accessories, needed for supply of power to
the construction sites, offices and camps.
Electric power may be available at the site, but the Contractor shall have available at the
site an emergency power supply (diesel generators) to ensure non-interrupted
construction power and to ensure the safety of the Works. The locations for installing
generators shall be approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall have the right, at all times, to inspect the Contractor’s electrical
installations. Those installations that are unsatisfactory shall be modified immediately by
the Contractor to the Engineer’s satisfaction at no additional cost to the Employer.
4. STORAGE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall maintain adequate storage facilities at the site for material, plant
and equipment to be employed in the works. The facilities shall conform to specific
storage requirements mentioned for different materials mentioned in the technical
specifications and in the Sections GR-090(Health and Safety) and GR-
100(Environmental Control). The Contractor’s storage facilities shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
5. TOILET FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide toilet facilities at the site for the use of its employees and
its sub-contractor’s employees. These facilities should include sewage collection,
treatment and disposal facilities. The construction site shall be kept clean and
serviceable at all times during the contract period.
6. FIRST AID FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide adequate first aid facilities on-site acceptable to the
Engineer. Failure of the Contractor to ensure the availability of first aid facilities on-site
GR - 0 40 - 6
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S S U B MI T T AL S
will result in an immediate ‘stop work’ order being issued. All costs and time delays
resulting from any such ‘stop work’ order shall entirely be the Contractor’s responsibility.
7. SECURITY
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for security at the site for the purpose of
protecting its stores, equipment, material, persons and property and for enforcing
regulations normal to an operation of this type and size. He shall cooperate fully with the
Engineer to ensure the overall security and safety of the Works. However, security of
the Works will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor until such work is completed
and turned over to and accepted by the Employer.
Duties of the Contractor shall include but not be limited to:
1. Provisions and maintenance of all necessary fencing.
2. Property security.
3. Lighting.
4. Guards, etc.
5. Safety of contractor’s employees at work etc.
And all other measures for the protection of the whole of the Works, all material
delivered to site and all persons employed in connection with the Works continuously,
including nights and holidays for the duration of the Contract.
8. GARBAGE DISPOSAL
The Contractor shall maintain a safe, healthy and tidy worksite at all times. He shall be
responsible for the collection and disposal of all garbage and refuse for itself and its
subcontractors. Proper and sufficient receptacles for refuse shall be provided. Collection
of refuse and garbage shall be made at least once per week, and disposal shall be
acceptable to the Engineer as per the local authority rules, regulations and in an
environmentally friendly way. The contractor shall be fully responsible for garbage
management at his own cost.
The dumping of refuse or any contaminant into the any stream or other watercourse
shall not be permitted. No trees, part of a tree, refuse, debris substance, other material
or contaminant shall be permitted to be thrown, deposited or dumped into any lake, river
or upon the bed, shores or banks thereof.
9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No measurement or separate payment shall be made for work under this section. The
costs for all the above requirements shall be deemed to be covered under appropriate
unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
GR-0 50-7
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S S U B MI T T A L S
SUBMITTALS
1. GENERAL
This Section covers the preparation and submission of the Contractor’s drawings,
design calculations, samples, manufacturer’s literature and brochures, photographs,
installation instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, schedules and reports as
specified herein and in the various other sections of the Specifications.
All submittals shall be in the English language. All dimensions and drawings shall be in
metric units, with the exception of manufactured components not readily available in
metric units.
2. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. The Contractor shall provide, where necessary, shop drawings of the various
structures of the project. Such details shall be to the extent necessary for review,
checking and approval by the Engineer, fabrication, assembly, delivery, site erection
and safe operation under the conditions described in the Specifications, including
working drawings and specifications prepared by other manufacturers. All drawings
for load-bearing and water-retaining structures shall be signed and stamped by a
Professional Engineer experienced in this kind of work. The drawings shall be in
sufficient detail to show:
i. The general arrangement and dimensions of all parts and size of each and every
part of the work to be supplied under the Contract.
ii. The nature of the material from which the various parts are to be made.
iii. All connections.
The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings in duplicate to the Engineer for
review and comment. All drawings submitted to the Engineer for review and
approval shall be signed, checked and approved by the Contractor prior to
submission. The Engineer, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be allowed 15
days to examine, review and comment upon such drawings or prints.
2. Work described by the shop drawings shall not commence without authorization
having been granted, in writing by the Engineer, and Employer will not accept or pay
for this work unless such authorization shall have first been granted.
3. All drawings shall bear the following title:
United Nations Office for Project Services
Modernization and Improvement of Policing Project (MIPP) in Nepal
4. All shop drawings on which changes are made shall have the revisions clearly
marked.
5. No change shall be made to any shop drawing accepted by the Engineer without
permission of the Engineer. Subsequent changes shall be requested by sending
another set of two copies of each reviewed drawing to the Engineer for review and
comment.
6. Review and comment of the Contractor’s drawings and design by the Engineer shall
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for correctness thereof, or for results
arising from errors or omissions, or for faults or defects, or for failure in the matter of
guarantees, which may become evident during construction or subsequent
operation.
7. After review and approval of the drawings by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
deliver to the Engineer, free of charge, two copies of all final drawings.
GR - 0 50 - 8
3. CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN CALCULATIONS
The Contractor shall submit copies of his design notes and calculations for those
structures for whose design he is responsible (shoring, formwork, scaffolding etc.).
These calculations shall be carried out under the supervision of an engineer
experienced in similar types of work. The cover page of the calculations should bear the
stamp and signature of this engineer verifying the completeness and correctness of the
design(s). If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide information on his
designer's education and experience.
At the time of tender, these notes and design calculations should be in sufficient detail
to enable the Engineer to evaluate the overall adequacy of the design. To meet these
requirements, the design calculations should be sufficient to demonstrate how loads on
the major structural elements were determined. Later, before the Contractor orders
materials or commences manufacturing, detailed design calculations and notes shall be
submitted for the Engineer’s review. The Engineer will require two weeks for these
reviews; therefore, the Contractor shall plan his work accordingly.
4. MATERIALS, DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1. Unless specified elsewhere in the Contract, materials incorporated into the work
shall be new, of an acceptable quality, and of the most suitable grades of their
respective kinds for their intended use, and the decision of the Engineer as to the
quality and suitability of material shall be final and binding.
2. Ownership of all material incorporated into the work or upon arrival at site,
whichever occurs first, shall be with the Employer. Any plant delivered by the
Contractor to the site may not be removed during the period of this Contract without
the approval of the Engineer.
3. During the progress of the work, the Contractor may offer material with equal or
better qualities and performance in substitution for those specified, which it
considers, will be in the Employer’s interest to accept. Any such offer shall be made
in writing to the Engineer for its consideration sufficiently in advance of the time at
which the Contractor wished to order the said material for use in the work, so that no
delay in the construction schedule occurs. The Contractor shall include, in duplicate
with its offer and at its own expense, complete data and samples that, together with
any other data the Engineer may require, will enable the Engineer to assess the
acceptability of the said material. The use of any material so offered will be
permitted only after written acceptance by the Engineer. Such acceptance by the
Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for efficiency,
sufficiency, quality and performance of the substitute material.
4. When the equivalent material necessities changes to or coordination with any other
portion of the work, the data submitted shall include drawings and details showing all
such changes, and the Contractor shall perform these changes, at its own expense,
as part of any acceptance of substitute material.
5. If the accepted equivalent material is of less value to the Employer or involves less
cost to the Contractor than the materials specified, an adjustment shall be made in
favor of the Employer on the basis of prices stated in the written acceptance from
the Engineer. In no case shall payment in excess of the prices entered in the Bill of
Quantities be made because of substitution of any material in place of another under
the provisions of this clause.
5. SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish two samples of the various materials intended to be used
on or in the Work, together with the technical specifications whenever requested by the
Engineer. Samples shall be sent to the Engineer with the carriage prepaid.
GR-0 50-9
After the Engineer has performed his review and analysis of samples, he will return one
sample to the Contractor, along with the Engineer’s comments.
Samples not approved shall be resubmitted until approved as satisfactory by the
Engineer. Approval of a sample shall not be taken in itself to change or modify any
Contract requirements.
Each sample shall be identified completely as to product, manufacture trade name,
style, model, location of use as well as names of the Contractor, Supplier and Project.
Field samples shall be prepared at the Site by the Contractor in the manner and number
requested by the Engineer.
6. TESTS AND TEST REPORT
6.1 General
The Contractor shall submit four copies of all detailed programs and procedures for
testing and/or commissioning of all materials and plant supplied under this Contract to
the Engineer for approval, not later than one month prior to the scheduled
commencement of these activities. Such programs and procedures shall include all the
tests specified in this Specification. The details should include the tests proposed to be
carried out, recommended test procedures, proposed sequence of testing with
anticipated duration of each test and a sample copy of the test result reports proposed
to be used. Programs of all these tests shall be incorporated into construction,
manufacturing and erection schedules.
6.2 Tests on Plants

Prior to the acceptance of plants or part of the plant by the Employer, the Contractor
shall carry out Tests on Completion in accordance with the approved test programs and
procedures referred to above. The Contractor shall maintain a logbook at the Site and
record the performance of all tests therein and verified by the engineer.
In cases where doubt exists regarding the manufacturer’s tests, the Engineer may
request repetition of such tests in his presence. All re-tests, if required, shall be done by
the Contractor at no extra cost in the event of defective materials or workmanship.
The Employer reserves the right to witness any tests, and the Contractor shall provide
reasonable notice thereof.
6.3 Tests on Materials

The materials, parts and assemblies shall be tested to comply with Indian Standard (IS)
or other standards specified. The tests and trials shall be recorded and certified by the
Contractor.
The test records for materials shall identify the component parts in which the materials
are to be used, and the certificate shall be prepared in such a way that it can easily be
determined if the applicable Specifications or standards have been complied with.
All radiographs, test specimens and test records shall become the property of the
Employer.
6.4 Shop or Mill Orders

As soon as practicable after receipt by the Contractor of the Letter of Acceptance, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of each mill or shop order for
materials purchased by the Contractor for use in the fabrication of the steel work
prescribed under this Specification, and which will require inspection at points other than
the Contractor’s premises. The copies of the orders shall state the place at which the
materials are to be manufactured. All such mill or shop orders shall quote the pertinent
reference to specifications for the materials to be furnished.
GR-0 50-10
6.5 Test Reports

After completion of each and every test required as proof of compliance with the
Specifications and/or each and every specified test, including commissioning tests, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two signed copies of a report covering such
tests. The test reports shall indicate the tests performed, the results obtained, and
instruments used, names of test personnel and provide for witnesses’ signatures. They
shall also be numbered and dated. Format of these reports shall be submitted at the
same time as the test procedures.
7. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS
1. Within ten calendar days from Notice of Award of Contract, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer, for revision and comment and acceptance by the Engineer,
a detailed construction program which shall include:
 A network diagram construction schedule completely detailing the Contractor’s
proposed operation and schedule for construction of the work. The critical path
method network chart shall indicate the early and late start and completion date
for the various activities.
 A narrative report which shall describe, in detail, the Contractor’s proposed
methods of carrying out each phase or portion of the work, the number of men
and the number, type and size of major pieces of plant required for the work.
2. The network diagram construction schedule shall show all activities represented by
the items listed in the Bill of Quantities and all related operations such as delivery
and erection of plant, construction of temporary roads, preparation of borrow areas,
etc.
3. In addition to construction activities, the network diagram construction schedule shall
show required dates of any material supplied by the Employer.
4. The Contractor’s network diagram construction schedule shall show and take into
account the key dates listed in Section GR-010 (Project Description).
5. The Contractor shall update and resubmit the network diagram construction
schedule to the Engineer on a monthly and on ad hoc basis. From time to time
during the period of the Contract, the Engineer will furnish the Contractor with
information on activities and events, whereupon the Contractor shall amend and
revise its network to include such information.
6. The construction program, as outlined above, when accepted by the Engineer, shall
form part of the Contract, and all work will be monitored by the Engineer and shall
be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the program. In the event that
individual activities are not started by the late start date indicated on the accepted
schedule or when activities are not completed by the late completion date indicated
on the accepted schedule or, if the Contractor fails to maintain the scheduled
progress as indicated on the accepted schedule, the Contractor shall be required to
work extra shifts, Saturdays and holidays or take other necessary emergency action,
acceptable to the Engineer, to ensure that the Contractor returns to the accepted
construction program within a period of not more than five (5) calendar days or the
Engineer’s written notice to the Contractor. All such work to complete late activities
will be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
8. INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall provide an instruction manual for guidance during installation and
testing of each item of equipment supplied by the Contractor and for subsequent
incorporation into the Employer’s operating and maintenance manual. The manual shall
describe and illustrate in detail the construction and recommended procedures for
GR- 050-1 1
assembling, disassembling, maintaining and operating the equipment. The manual, as a

minimum, shall include the following information:
1. Index of manual and Specifications reference.
2. General description: Technical and design data, including weights and dimensions
of major components of the work.
3. Installation procedures: Pertinent information including installation procedures
issued at the site for construction.
4. Operating Instructions: Complete information related to operation and performance
of the equipment.
5. Maintenance instructions: Complete details for maintenance, including frequency of
lubrication an recommended lubricants; dismantling and reassembling instructions;
details of protective coatings, paint materials, and application instructions; and a list
of spare parts with manufacturer’s parts numbers.
6. Contractor’s Drawing List: Complete list of shop drawings (where applicable) issued
by contractor.
7. Manufacturer’s bulletins: All pertinent bulletins instruction manuals and performance
curves prepared by the various manufacturers of component parts of the Work.
8. Addresses for ordering of spare parts.
The Contractor shall submit three draft copies of the manual to the Engineer for review.
The Engineer will review and return the manual within 21 days of receipt. Following final
review, the Contractor shall forward two final copies of the complete manual to the
Employer. If revision of the manual becomes necessary as a result of information gained
during installation, testing, or initial operation, the Contractor shall immediately make the
appropriate revision and submit two copies of the revised pages and/or drawings,
suitably dated.
9. PHOTOGRAPHS
During manufacture and delivery, the Contractor shall provide photographs of every
major component of the work. Subsequently, during the construction and installation
stage, the Contractor shall provide progress photographs of the works on a monthly and
on ad hoc basis. All the photographs must be adequately identified with brief
descriptions of the works, dates and locations.
GR-0 50-12
S E CT I ON G R- 0 6 0
PRE-CONSTRUCTION WORKS
1. GENERAL
This Section covers the works to be performed by the Contractor prior to commencing
the construction activities at the Site.
2. CONDITION-IN SURVEY
The Engineer and the Contractor shall carry out a joint condition-in survey using video
or digital photographs to record the condition of the Site upon handover to the
Contractor. This survey shall determine the state of the Site that the Contractor must
hand back upon completion of the Works (refer Section GR-100).
3. SITE FAMILIARIZATION
Prior to mobilization, the Contractor shall acquaint himself with the existing physical and
working conditions at the Site, in particular the following:
a. Existing structures, facilities and amenities at the Site, including occupied areas of
the Site or buildings.
b. Any limitations and restrictions on access on to and within the Site, use of the Site
for temporary works and construction plant, including working and storage areas,
location of offices, workshops, sheds, roads and parking.
c. Any limitations and restrictions on working times.
Based on this study, the Contractor shall prepare a site plan showing his proposed
locations and alignments of construction facilities and submit it to the Engineer for his
review and approval.
4. PROVISIONS FOR OCCUPIED AREAS OF SITE OR BUILDINGS
For the parts of Site designated as occupied areas, the Contractor shall, in consultation
with the Engineer, make the following provisions to allow occupants to continue using
the area during the entire construction period or part thereof, as required:
a. Make available safe access for occupants.
b. Arrange work to minimize nuisance to occupants and ensure their safety.
c. Protect occupants against weather, dust, dirt, water or other nuisance by such
means as temporary screens.
5. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
The Contractor shall plan and implement the following protection measures for persons
and property on and adjacent to the Site in order to minimize the number and duration
of interruptions:
a. Provide and maintain required barricades, guards, fencing, shoring, temporary
roadways, footpaths, signs, lighting and traffic flagging.
b. Protect and maintain access ways (roadways and footpaths) and existing services
(drains, watercourses etc.) that are in use on or adjacent to the Site. On-site
services that are to be continued shall be repaired, diverted or relocated as required
GR- 060-1 3
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S P RE - CO NS T RU CT I ON WO RK S
while those to be abandoned shall be cut and sealed or disconnected and made
safe.
c. Protect property that is to remain on or adjacent to the Site, including adjoining
property encroaching onto the Site.
The Contractor shall submit proposals to the Engineer for action on existing services
before starting this work.
6. CONDITION SURVEY OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Engineer and owners/occupants of

adjoining properties, carry out a survey of these properties to record their pre-
commencement condition. As part of the survey, the Contractor shall make detailed
records of conditions existing within the properties, especially structural defects and
other damage or defacement. The Contractor shall arrange for at least two copies of
each record, including drawings, written descriptions and photographs, to be endorsed
by the owners and occupants, or their representatives, as evidence of conditions
existing before commencement of work and submit one endorsed copy of each record
to the Engineer. The Contractor shall keep the other endorsed copy.
7. DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
Prior to mobilization to the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following documents to
the Engineer for his review and approval:
 Results of Condition-in Survey.
 Site Survey [refer Section GR-070 (Layout of Work and Survey)].
 Result of condition survey of adjoining property.
 Work Method Statement.
 Construction Program [refer Section GR-050 (Contractor’s Submittals)].
 Contractor’s Quality Assurance/ Quality Control (QA/QC) Plan, as per the minimum
requirements set out in Section GR-080(Quality Control).
 Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan (HSP), as per the minimum requirements set
out in Section GR-090 (Health and Safety).
 Contractor’s Environmental Protection Plan, as per the minimum requirements set
out in Section GR-100 (Environmental Control).
 Schedule of Materials and Installed Equipment.
A pre-construction meeting will be held between the Engineer and the Contractor to
review the above documentation. If the documentation is incomplete, the Contractor will
have three calendar days to revise and resubmit the documentation for approval.
GR-0 60-14
LAYOUT OF WORK AND SURVEY
1. GENERAL
This section of the Specifications covers the requirements and procedures for layout of
work, quantity survey, quality control and verifying dimensions of existing structures.
The survey shall include, but may not be limited to, the following main activities:
1. Establishing the location, layout and setting dimensions of the new project
structures.
2. Surveying, measuring and recording the actual layout, dimensions and conditions of
existing structures and their components, where modification to or extension of them
are planned.
3. Monitoring the behavior of existing structures during the excavation and construction
of the adjacent new structures.
4. Measurements and dimensional checks during construction of concrete structures
and erection of structural steel for quality control.
2. BENCHMARKS
Prior to start of construction, the Engineer shall provide benchmarks to the Contractor in
the vicinity of project structures.
3. SURVEY POINT MARKERS
Utilizing the benchmark and existing structural features, the Contractor shall fix
necessary survey lines, points and elevations for each structure as the construction
work proceeds and shall verify all dimensions needed for his design or for control of
construction.
Survey point markers shall be durable, fixed firmly to rock or concrete and be
adequately protected. Each survey points shall be designated by a clearly legible and
durable inscription, which shall be provided and preserved by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall take all measures required, at his own cost, for the adequate protection
and preservation of the basic survey points.
4. SURVEY EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL
The Contractor’s instruments and other survey equipment shall be accurate, suitable for
the surveys required in accordance with recognized professional standards and in
proper condition and adjustment at all time.
Surveys shall be performed only by qualified, properly trained and experienced
personnel. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the correctness of his survey
work and for the actions of personnel engaged in it.
5. FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS
The Contractor shall record the surveys in proper field notebooks. A copy of such
records, measurement and calculations, properly indexed, shall be furnished to the
Engineer when completed.
GR- 070-1 5
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S L A Y O UT OF WO RK AND SU RV E Y
6. USE BY THE ENGINEER
The Engineer may, at any time, use line and grade points markers established by the
Contractor. The Contractor’s surveys are a part of the Work and may be checked by the
Engineer or the representative of the Engineer at any time. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any lines, grades or measurements which do not comply with specified
or proper tolerances, or which are otherwise defective, and for any resultant defects in
the Work. The Contractor will be required to conduct re-surveys or check surveys to
correct errors indicated by review of the field notebooks.
7. RESPONSIBILITY
Any check or control by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the accuracy of structures or parts of them with regard to their positions and
dimensions, or for the accuracy of the erection work executed by the Contractor or its
sub-contractor.
8. SURVEY OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall conduct survey, measurement and observations of existing

structures on the Site to the extent as necessary to establish relevant dimensions and
conditions required for the design and construction of the adjacent or interconnected
new structures or structural components.
9. MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENTS
No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section.
The unit rates and lump sum prices offered for civil works shall be deemed to cover all
the Contractor’s necessary layout and survey works.
GR-0 70-16
QUALITY CONTROL
1. GENERAL
The intent of this Section is to enable the Contractor to establish a necessary level of
quality control that will:
a. Adequately provide for the production of acceptable quality materials.
b. Provide sufficient information to assure both the Contractor and the Engineer that
the specification requirements can be met.
c. Allow the Contractor as much latitude as possible to develop his or her own standard
of control.
Although guidelines are established and certain minimum requirements are specified
herein and elsewhere in the Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for accomplishing the stated purpose. The quality control requirements
contained in this section and elsewhere in the technical specifications are in addition to
and separate from the acceptance testing requirements. Acceptance testing
requirements are the responsibility of the Engineer.
2. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAM
2.1 General Description

The Contractor shall establish, provide and maintain an effective Quality Control
Program (QCP) that details the methods and procedures that will be taken to assure
that all materials and completed construction required by this Contract conform to
contract plans, technical specifications and other requirements, whether manufactured
by the Contractor or procured from sub-contractors or vendors. The QCP shall describe
procedures to perform inspection and testing of all items of work required by the
technical specifications, including those performed by sub-contractors. It shall ensure
conformance to applicable specifications and plans with respect to materials,
workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance.
The QCP shall be effective for control of all construction work performed under this
Contract and shall specifically include surveillance and tests required by the technical
specifications, in addition to other requirements of this section and any other activities
deemed necessary by the Contractor to establish an effective level of quality control.
2.2 Quality Control Program

The Contractor shall describe the QCP in a written document that shall be reviewed and
approved by the Engineer prior to the start of any production, construction or off-site
fabrication of materials to be incorporated into the completed work. The Engineer shall
choose an adequate period for the review, this period not being less than one week.
The Contractor shall present and discuss his understanding of quality control
requirements at the preconstruction conference.
The QCP shall be organized to address, as a minimum, the following items:
a. Contractor’s quality control organization.
b. Submittals schedule.
c. Inspection requirements.
d. Quality control testing plan.
GR- 080-1 7
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S Q U AL I T Y C O N T R O L
e. Documentation of quality control activities.

f. Requirements for corrective action when quality control and/or acceptance criteria
are not met.
The Contractor is encouraged to add any additional elements to the QCP that he deems
necessary to adequately control all production and/or construction processes required
by this contract.
3. QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
The Contractor’s QCP shall be implemented by the establishment of a separate quality

control organization. An organizational chart shall be developed to show all quality
control personnel and how these personnel integrate with other management/production
and construction functions and personnel.
The organizational chart shall identify all quality control staff by name and function and
shall indicate the total staff required to implement all elements of the QCP, including
inspection and testing for each item of work. If necessary, different technicians can be
utilized for specific inspection and testing functions for different items of work. If an
outside organization or independent testing laboratory is used for implementation of all
or part of the QCP, these organizations and their assigned personnel shall be listed in
the organization chart.
The quality control organization shall consist of the following minimum personnel:
a. Program Administrator
b. Quality Control Technicians
Program Administrator
The Program Administrator shall be a full-time employee of the Contractor or a
consultant engaged by the Contractor. He shall have a minimum of 5 years of
experience in building construction and shall have had prior quality control experience
on a project of comparable size and scope as the contract. Additional qualifications for
the Program Administrator shall include at least one of the following requirements:
a. Professional engineer with one year of building construction experience acceptable
to the Engineer.
b. Engineer with two years of building construction experience acceptable to the
Engineer.
c. An individual with three years of building construction experience acceptable to the
Engineer, with a Bachelor of Science Degree in Civil Engineering, Civil Engineering
Technology or Construction.
d. Certified Construction materials technician.
The Program Administrator shall have full authority to institute any and all actions
necessary for the successful implementation of the QCP to ensure compliance with the
contract plans and technical specifications. He shall report directly to a responsible
officer of the construction firm.
Quality Control Technicians

A sufficient number of quality control technicians necessary to adequately implement the
QCP shall be provided. These personnel shall either be engineers, engineering
technicians or experienced craftsman with qualifications in the appropriate field (related
to construction materials) and shall have a minimum of two years of experience in their
area of expertise.
GR-0 80-18
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S Q U ALI T Y CO NT R OL
The quality control technicians shall report directly to the Program Administrator and
shall perform the following functions:
a. Inspection of all materials, construction plant and equipment for conformance to the
technical specifications.
b. Performance of all quality control tests as required by the technical specifications.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient qualified quality control personnel to monitor each
work activity at all times. Where material is being produced in a plant for incorporation
into the work, separate plant and field technicians shall be provided at each plant and
field placement location. The scheduling and coordinating of all inspection and testing
must match the type and pace of work activity. The QCP shall state where different
technicians will be required for different work elements.
4. SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall submit a detailed listing of all submittals related to quality control,
e.g. mix designs, material certifications, etc., required by the technical specifications.
The listing shall be developed in a spreadsheet format and shall include:
a. Specification item number.
b. Item description.
c. Description of submittal.
d. Specification paragraph requiring submittal; and
e. Scheduled date of submittal.
5. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Quality control inspection functions shall be organized to provide inspection for all
definable features of work, as detailed below. Inspections shall be performed daily to
ensure continuing compliance with the contract requirements until completion of the
particular feature of work. These shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. During plant operation for material production, quality control test results and
periodic inspections shall be utilized to ensure the quality of aggregates and other
mix components and to adjust and control mix proportioning to meet the approved
mix design and other requirements of the technical specifications. All equipment
utilized in proportioning and mixing shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating
condition. The QCP shall detail how these and other quality control functions will be
accomplished and utilized.
b. During field operations, quality control test results and periodic inspections shall be
utilized to ensure the quality of all materials and workmanship. All equipment utilized
in placing, finishing and compacting shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating
condition and to ensure that all such operations are in conformance to the technical
specifications and are within the plan dimensions, lines, grades and tolerances
specified. The Program shall document how these and other quality control functions
will be accomplished and utilized.
6. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING PLAN
As a part of the overall QCP, the Contractor shall implement a quality control testing
plan, as required by the technical specifications. The testing plan shall include the
minimum tests and test frequencies required by each technical specification item, as
well as any additional quality control tests that the Contractor deems necessary to
adequately control production and/or construction processes.
GR- 080-1 9
The testing plan can be developed in a spreadsheet format and shall, as a minimum,
include the following:
a. Specification item number (e.g. CS-040).
b. Item description (e.g. cement concrete).
c. Test type (e.g. gradation, grade).
d. Test standard (e.g. IS or ASTM test number, as applicable).
e. Test frequency (e.g. as required by technical specifications or minimum frequency
when requirements are not stated).
f. Responsibility (e.g. plant technician).
g. Control requirements (e.g. target, permissible deviations).
The testing plan shall contain a statistically based procedure of random sampling for
acquiring test samples. The Engineer shall be pre-informed by the contractor to witness
quality control sampling and testing.
7. DOCUMENTATION
The Contractor shall maintain current quality control records of all inspections and tests
performed. These records shall include factual evidence that the required inspections or
tests have been performed, including type and number of inspections or tests involved
the following:
 Results of inspections or tests.
 Nature of defects, deviations, causes for rejection, etc.
 Proposed remedial actions.
 Corrective actions taken.
The records must cover both conforming and defective or deficient features and must
include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in the work are in full
compliance with the terms of the contract. Legible copies of these records shall be
furnished to the Engineer daily or as required by the Engineer. The records shall cover
all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified and
signed by the Contractor’s Program Administrator.
Specific contractor quality control records required for the contract shall include, but are
not necessarily limited to, the following records:
Daily Inspection Reports
Each Contractor Quality Control Technician shall maintain a daily log of all inspections
performed for both Contractor and sub-contractor’s operations on a form acceptable to
the Engineer. These technician’s daily reports shall provide factual evidence that
continuous quality control inspections have been performed and shall, as a minimum,
include the following:
a. Technical specification item number and description.
b. Compliance with approved submittals.
c. Proper storage of materials and equipment.
d. Proper operation of all equipment.
e. Adherence to plans and technical specifications.
f. Review of quality control tests.
g. Safety inspection.
GR-0 80-20
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S Q U ALI T Y CO NT R OL
The daily inspection reports shall identify inspections conducted, results of inspections,
location and nature of defects found, causes for rejection and remedial or corrective
actions taken or proposed. They shall be signed by the responsible Quality Control
Technician and the Program Administrator. The Engineer shall be provided at least one
copy of each daily inspection report on the work day following the day of record.
Test Reports
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that will record all quality
control test results. The test reports shall document the following information:
a. Technical specification item number and description.
b. Test designation.
c. Location.
d. Date of test.
e. Control requirements.
f. Test results.
g. Causes for rejection.
h. Recommended remedial actions.
i. Retests.
Test results from each day’s work period shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the
start of the next day’s work period. When required by the technical specifications, the
Contractor shall maintain statistical quality control charts. The daily test reports shall be
signed by the responsible quality control technician and the Program Administrator and
verified by the Engineer.
8. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
The QCP shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken when a process is deemed, or
believed, to be out of control (out of tolerance) and detail what action will be taken to
bring the process into control. The requirements for corrective action shall include both
general requirements for operation of the QCP as a whole and for individual items of
work contained in the technical specifications.
The QCP shall detail how the results of quality control inspections and tests will be used
for determining the need for corrective action and shall contain clear sets of rules to
gauge when a process is out of control and the type of correction to be taken to regain
process control.
When applicable or required by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall
establish and utilize statistical quality control charts for individual quality control tests.
The requirements for corrective action shall be linked to the control charts.
9. SURVEILLANCE BY ENGINEER
All items of material and equipment shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at
the point of production, manufacture or shipment to determine if the Contractor,
producer, manufacturer or shipper maintains an adequate quality control system in
conformance with the requirements detailed herein and the applicable technical
specifications and plans. In addition, all items of materials, equipment and work in place
shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at the site for the same purpose.
Surveillance by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of performing quality
control inspections of either on-site or off-site works of the Contractor or his sub-
contractors.
GR- 080-2 1
10. NONCOMPLIANCE
The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with any of the foregoing
requirements. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take
corrective action. Any notice, when delivered by the Engineer or his authorized
representative to the Contractor or his authorized representative at the Site of the work,
shall be considered sufficient notice.
In cases where quality control activities do not comply with either the Contractor’s QCP
or the contract provisions, or where the Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain
an effective QCP, as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer may:
a. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control personnel.
b. Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective actions are
taken.
No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. It
is deemed that all the costs of all the above requirements are covered under appropriate
GR-0 80-22
S E CT I ON GR - 9 0
HEALTH AND SAFETY
1. GENERAL
1.1 Responsibility for Safety

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all operations in connection with
the Contract and shall take all necessary actions and precautions to ensure the safety of
all persons who may be in, on or adjacent to the Site.
1.2 Compliance with UNOPS Workplace Safety and Health Policy and Procedures
The Contractor shall comply with the UNOPS Workplace Safety and Health Policy and
Procedures (WSHPP), including but not limited to other rules and regulations, standards
and codes of practice related and relevant to the promotion of safe practices and
conduct at the worksite.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the
WSHPP, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any
work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall
not permit any person to do anything that is not in accordance with the generally
accepted principles of safe and sound practices.
The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the site at all times. All safety
provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed. The Contractor shall
ensure that his workmen take necessary and sufficient precautions when safety
provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions to be
used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe.
Where the UNOPS Project Manager appoints an engineer to carry out the following
temporary works regulated by UNOPS WSHPP:
 Cantilevered platforms erected more than 3 m above ground
 Formwork structure
 Runway and ramp for use of motor trucks or heavy vehicles
 Stability of structure adjacent to excavation
 Shoring and bracing for trench excavation > 4m
The engineer shall comply with any duties imposed on him under WSHPP, including:
 Design it to acceptable codes and standards and in accordance with good
engineering practices.
 Ensure that it is constructed in accordance to his design.
 When constructed, the engineer should check it for safety and issue a certificate
stating that it is safe for its intended use.
 The engineer shall exercise due diligence when carrying out his duties.
 The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of WSHPP and the requirements
specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.
1.3 Undertaking by Contractor

The Contractor shall undertake to ensure that the provisions of the WSHPP are
complied with. The attached safety provisions undertaking form for the Contractor in
GR-9 0-23
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E ME N T S S I T E MEE T I NG S
“Appendix I” shall be complied by a Managing Director or other duly authorized

representative of the company/firm awarded the Contract.
1.4 Contractor’s Health and Safety Program

The Contractor shall not begin any construction or production of materials to be
incorporated into the completed work until the Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan
(HSP) has been reviewed by UNOPS. The HSP shall describe in detail relevant safety
equipment and safe methods of work employed at each stage of construction. It shall
highlight special risks involving specialized equipment and shall also include company
safety policy, risk assessment, safety rules and regulations, small group activities, safety
promotion program (safety slogans, safety campaign, slide shows, etc.), safety training,
emergency procedures and other such activities. The HSP must be displayed outside
the site office. The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen,
exit/entry points of buildings and passenger-cum-material hoist area.
1.5 Monthly Safety Review

The Contractor shall carry out monthly safety review of the measures contained within
the HSP to demonstrate that the required level of safety are being achieved and
maintained and make a full report to UNOPS on each such review. UNOPS will review
the HSP from time to time and will advise the Contractor of any matter with which he is
not satisfied, and the Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to satisfy
UNOPS. UNOPS will carry out such safety studies or audits, as considered necessary.
The Contractor shall make available specialist personnel, as the UNOPS may consider
necessary, for the performance of such safety studies or audits.
1.6 Risk Management

The Contractor shall conduct a risk assessment in relation to the safety and health risks
posed to any person who may be affected by his undertaking prior to the
commencement of work in accordance to the UNOPS WSHPP. He shall take all
reasonably practicable steps to eliminate any foreseeable risk to any person likely to be
affected by his undertaking. He shall maintain a record of risk assessments conducted,
including any control measures taken or to be taken and any safe work procedures.
The Contractor shall ensure that his employees are informed of the nature of the risks
involved, the measures implemented to control the risks and the applicable safe work
procedures. Whenever the assessment of a risk is revised, or where control measures
or safe work procedures are changed, the Contractor shall inform his employees of such
changes.
2. SITE SAFETY MEASURES
2.1 Fall Prevention

The Contractor must develop procedures in a fall protection plan for the construction site
if his worker at the work site may fall 3 m or more but guardrails do not protect the
worker. He must have a fall protection system in place and available at the construction
site before work with a risk of falling begins. In particular, the Contractor must have the
following devices and system in place prior to start of the work:
 Fall arresting devices such as rope grabs, guard rails, etc.
 Safety belts, body harness, lanyards consisting of carabiners, D-rings, O-Rings,
ovals rings, self-locking connectors and snap hooks.
2.2 Metal Access Scaffold and Working Platforms

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain metal access scaffold for all building
blocks that have 2 and more storeys or 3 m and more height. The scaffold shall be
erected ahead of the structural work from the second storey and shall be supported by
GR-1 10-24
G E N E R AL R E Q U I R E M E N T S S I T E ME E T I N G S
cantilevered platforms erected according to reasonable safety standards. The

cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1 m, or any other approved distance, from
the edge of the building. The scaffold shall be erected within 300 mm from the building
edge. Where the structure does not allow the scaffold to be erected from the second
storey or where the building is less than 12 m in height, the Contractor may erect the
scaffold from the first storey, subject to review by UNOPS.
The Contractor and his engineer shall ensure that the building structure can resist the
load imposed by the scaffold. The scaffold shall be designed to carry metal working
platforms and two working levels in use concurrently. The maximum average loading
per working level per bay shall be 220 kg/m2. Signboards showing the maximum loading
allowed on the scaffold shall be displayed on the scaffold.
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain continuous metal work platforms or
other types of work platforms at every alternate lift starting from the second lift of the
scaffold, the immediate level below the topmost level and the roof level of the building
block under construction. Where the height between the work platform at the roof level
and the platform directly below is two lifts or less, the latter work platform may not be
necessary. No omission from the Contract Sum shall be made in the event that such a
work platform is not necessary.
The material used for the metal work platform shall be steel. Work platforms shall be
adequately secured to scaffolding frames at the required levels. The connections
between the work platforms and the scaffolding frames, and between the work
platforms, shall be subject to review by UNOPS.
For any portion of the work platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the
Contractor may use timber platform subject to the review by UNOPS. The platform shall
be complete with at least 90 mm high colored toe boards and metal guardrails at least 1
m above the work platform.
The work platform shall be at least 500 mm in width. They shall be used for:
 Erecting and dismantling of formwork of structural elements.
 Transferring of formwork or other materials from one working level to another.
 External finishing works.
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the
entire external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of
the scaffold closely. A 90 mm high colored toe board shall be provided at the base of
the net. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net,
and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The scaffold shall be
effectively tied to the building structure by means of tiebacks. All tiebacks shall be
painted with bright color for easy identification.
For buildings next to areas less than 30 m away from the site boundary, the Contractor
shall provide special mid-height work platform supporting metal access scaffold at the
building elevation directly facing public areas, walkways, children playgrounds, schools
and other locations with public traffic. This platform shall be installed from the floor level
at the mid height of the building and shall project 6 m from the edge of the floor. They
shall be supported at the floor level below by diagonal members. Tension tiebacks to
upper floors shall not be used. Around the edges of the 6 m platform, guardrails and toe
boards shall be provided. Guardrail shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to
withstand, without permanent deformation or failure, a 50 kg load applied in any
direction at right angles to the guardrail.
The work platform and its supports shall be designed by an Engineer to a uniformly
distributed live load of 1.5 kg/m² and the loading from the scaffold. Supports for platform
shall be spaced at not more than 1.8 m centers.
GR- 110-2 5
2.3 Overhead Shelters

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of
entry/ exit of buildings that are two or more storeys in height. The shelters shall be
constructed immediately below the second storey. They shall project at least 3 m from
the building edge and shall be at least 1.5 m wide. They shall be made of curved metal
roofing with a diameter of at least 1.5 m or of pitched metal roofing with a slope greater
than one in two, with timber boarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid
bases.
The access to, along and egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from
obstructions and accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances that may
cause slipping and tripping.
2.4 Peripheral Overhead Shelters

The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of 15 m or more
in height. They shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the third storey
slab. They shall be at least 2 m wide and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150
mm higher than the inner edge. They shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of
at least 75 kg point load.
2.5 Barricades to Lift Openings, Voids, Open Sides of Buildings and Excavations
The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids, open sides of buildings
and excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1 m
high and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point load of 50
kg.
2.6 Dangerous Corners

At all approaches and exits, and dangerous corners, danger and warning signals shall
be placed to ensure safety of pedestrians and vehicular traffic. In case of platforms,
gangways, runs and ramps, dangerous corners shall be protected with fencing or railing
whose minimum height shall be 1.1 m and, if necessary, they may be protected with toe
boards. All dangerous corners shall be well lighted for night work.
2.7 Forms for Concrete

Formwork shall be designed after taking into consideration spans, setting temperature of
concrete, dead load and working loads to be supported and adequate safety factor for
the materials used for formwork.
All timber formwork shall be carefully inspected before use and all unacceptable
material shall be discarded. As timber centering usually takes an initial set when vertical
load is applied, the design of such centering shall make allowance for this factor. The
vertical supports shall be adequately braced or otherwise secured in position so that
these do not fail when the load gets released or when the supports are, accidentally hit.
In case of timber posts, vertical joints shall be properly designed. The connections shall
normally be with bolts and nuts. Use of rusted or spoilt threaded bolts and nuts shall be
avoided.
Tubular steel centering shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
When tubular, steel and timber centering is to be used in combination, necessary
precautions shall be taken to avoid any unequal settlement under load. A thorough
inspection of tubular steel centering is necessary before its erection and members
showing evidence of excessive rusting, kinks, dents or damaged welds shall be
discarded. Buckled or broken members shall be replaced. Care shall also be taken to
see that the locking devices are in good working order and that the coupling pins are
effectively aligned to frames.
GR-1 10-26
Sills under the supports shall be set on firm soil or other suitable material in a pattern
that assures adequate stability for all props. Care shall be taken not to disturb the soil
under the support. Adequate drainage shall be provided to drain away water coming
due to rain, washing of forms or during the curing of the concrete, to avoid softening of
the supporting soil strata.
All centering shall be regularly inspected to ensure that footings of sills under every post
of centering are sound, the centering panels are plumb in both directions and all cross
braces are securely in place. During pouring of concrete, the centering shall be
constantly inspected and strengthened if required, and wedges below the vertical
supports shall be tightened. Adequate protection of centering shall be ensured from
moving vehicles or swinging loads.
Forms shall not be removed earlier than the limit laid down in the specifications and not
until it is certain that the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself and
all loads that will be imposed on it. Only workmen actually engaged in removing the
formwork shall be allowed in the area during these operations. Those engaged in
removing the formwork shall wear helmets, gloves and heavy soled shoes, and
approved safety belt if adequate footing is not provided above 2 in level. While cutting
any, wires in tension, care shall be taken to prevent backlash that might hit the body.
Dismantling of supports shall be done under the supervision of a competent engineer
and the order of dismantling of individual supports laid down in the instruction sheets
shall be closely followed.
2.8 Suspended Scaffolds

A suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair, redecoration
and minor work. Where suspended scaffold system is to be used, the Contractor shall
notify UNOPS prior to its installation and usage. The safe working load will be
prominently displayed. The Contractor shall ensure that these scaffolds are checked by
his supervisor weekly and after inclement weather. The scaffolds shall also be check by
an Engineer (Civil) every month.
Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold may be used
for finishing works. Independent lifelines shall be provided for suspended scaffold
riggers and users to anchor their safety harness attached with shock absorbing device.
2.9 Mobile Cranes

No person shall install, repair, alter or dismantle a mobile crane unless he is an
approved mechanic. The Contractor/mechanic shall ensure, so far as is reasonably
practicable, that the mobile crane is erected, installed or modified in such a manner that
it is safe, and without risk to health, when properly used. The Contractor shall ensure
that the crane access is properly constructed and checked weekly by his supervisor.
The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside
the contract boundary without the review by UNOPS. All hoisting areas must be
effectively barricaded. The Contractor shall install barriers to warn the crane operator of
depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions.
The Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the site to oversee and guide the
crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. He shall ensure that the crane
operator carries out daily checks. The cranes must have overhaul checks before being
used on the site.
2.10 Ladders
The Contractor must ensure that ladders are in an acceptable sound condition and
submit a written inspection report to UNOPS. If the ladders are made of a material other
than steel, the Contractor must ensure that the ladder is in sound condition. If they are
GR- 110-2 7
constructed of lumber/timber, the Contractor must ensure that the timber is free of loose
knots or knot holes, must not have a split and must be strong and sturdy.
The Contractor’s worker must ensure that:
 The ladder is secured against movement and placed on a base that is stable.
 The base of an inclined ladder is no further from the base of the wall or structure
than 1.4 times of the height to where the ladder contacts the wall or structure.
2.11 Temporary Staircases

The Contractor shall provide and maintain a minimum 0.8 m wide temporary metal
staircase from one working floor to another. The staircase shall be placed against the
adjacent staircase wall or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction.
The outer sides of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1 m above the
outer staircase strings. The bottom of the staircase shall be covered fully with metal
plate.
2.12 Refuse Disposal

Refuse accumulation shall never be allowed as the resulting loading may be excessive.
Materials liable to cause persons to slip or trip and fall shall be cleared immediately.
Projecting nails shall be removed or bent over. Discharge of waste concrete on
platforms or accumulating bricks on work platforms that could result in a sudden
collapse shall be avoided.
2.13 Temporary Chute for Removal of Construction Debris

The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chutes to dispose
construction debris from the upper storey of building blocks that are two storey and
higher. The chutes shall be erected to follow the structural work. A large bin at the lower
end of each chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. Warning signs, such as
“DANGER – KEEP OUT” in the Nepali and English languages painted in red on a white
background in gloss finishing paint shall be posted at the bin area.
2.14 Personal Protective Equipment

The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE) for all workmen employed on the site. The PPE shall consist of the following:
 Hearing protection equipment, such as ear defenders, earplugs, etc. (where
required).
 Eye protection, such as safety eye wears, welding goggles and shields, etc.
 Foot protection, such as safety shoes/boots, etc.
 Head protection, such as hard hats.
 Limb and body protection, such as gloves, reflective vests, etc.
 Respirators, as necessary and adequate.
The Contractor shall ensure that such PPE comply with the requirements of UNOPS. He
shall also ensure that his workmen properly use all equipment during the course of their
work. He shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen in prescribed forms.
Such forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times.
2.15 Warning Signs and Lights

The Contractor shall display warning signs of size 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points
around the periphery of the site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall
have the words “DANGER – KEEP OUT” in Nepali and English languages painted in red
GR-1 10-28
on a white background in gloss finishing paint. Warning lights shall be placed at similar
positions at night to serve as warnings.
2.16 Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment

The Contractor shall use gas cylinders, each fitted with a low pressure gauge, a high
pressure gauge, a reducing valve with pressure regulator and a safety relief device. The
gas cylinders shall not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is
being carried out or placed within 5 m of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must
always be kept upright in a wheeled-trolley. When lifted by crane, hoist or derrick,
cylinders must be placed in cradles or skip box design. Protective valve caps shall also
be in place.
The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or
other related works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from defect,
properly maintained and not entangled or kinked. Valves and fittings shall be tested for
leak with “soap water” every day before use.
2.17 Construction Machinery

Dangerous moving parts of moving machinery shall be effectively guarded or made safe
by position. Scheduled inspection and maintenance of all machinery shall be carried
out. Cleaning, lubrication and maintenance of machines shall only be done after they
have come to a complete stop. A lockout system shall be implemented in order to
ensure that machines are not restarted while work is being carried out on them.
Operators shall be instructed in the operation of the machine before starting work on it.
Machinery work areas shall be fenced off to keep out those whose proximity to the
machine might endanger them.
2.17.1 Woodworking Machines

The following safety devices shall be incorporated onto the woodworking machines:
 Adjustable guard that shall cover the cutting tool;
 Anti-kickback device where the work piece is liable to be ejected. In the case of
circular saws, a riving knife shall be adequate.
 push sticks.
Portable woodwork machines shall also incorporate guards.
Cleaning of wood waste around the machines shall only be carried out when the
machine has stopped and then only with the use of brushes and not bare hands.
2.17.2 Concrete Mixers

Moving parts that are liable to become nip points, such as gears, chains and rollers shall
be guarded. Hoppers into which a person could fall shall also be guarded. Fencing shall
be provided to prevent entry around the zones where hoppers or mixing drums may be
tilted or turned.
Operators cleaning concrete mixers shall do so outside the rotating drums. Lockout
devices shall be provided where workers need to enter.
Where concrete mixers are driven by internal combustion engines, exhaust points shall
be located away from the workers’ workstation so as to eliminate their exposure to
obnoxious fumes.
2.17.3 Concreting Pumping System

Concrete pumping workstations shall be provided with overhead covers. Piping shall be
secured to prevent movement. Pipelines shall not be attached to temporary structures
such as scaffolds and formwork support as the forces and movements may affect their
GR- 110-2 9
integrity. Pipe connectors, particularly those installed at heights shall be secured against
dislodgement, thereby becoming a falling object.
2.17.4 Earth-moving Equipment

Earth-moving vehicles shall be provided with standard safety features such as lights,
rear mirrors, and for large vehicles, an audible reversing signal.
No earth-moving equipment shall be started up until all persons are cleared away.
Supervisors and operators shall survey the route of the earth-moving equipment for:
 Electrical lines which may be an obstruction;
 Rating of bridges and overhead obstructions;
 Underground conduits containing service lines;
 Slope-gradients.
Where the equipment has to slew around as part of the operation, such as a back-hoe,
and where there are other workers in its proximity, a signaler shall be present to direct
the operator.
2.18 Housekeeping
The Contractor shall maintain and ensure a safe working environment by keeping the
site neat and tidy and free from hazards and debris. Materials shall be stacked up
safely. All work areas and access thereto shall be kept free from hazards and debris.
Housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times so as not to
cause any inconvenience to either the adjoining occupiers or the public. Debris shall be
wetted to minimize the risk of dust. Containers for debris and rubbish are to be provided
at the designated places.
2.19 Safety Information Signboard and Assembly Stage

The Contractor shall erect and maintain a Safety Information Signboard and Assembly
Stage. The signboard shall be 6 m x 3 m, made of timber plywood and fixed at a steel
frame. The signboard shall consist of safety posters, safety theme and pictures, safety
news, photos of good safety measures and one 600 mm x 1500 mm mirror. The safety
posters, news and photos shall be protected from weather. The arrangement and size of
display of all items referred herein shall be submitted to the UNOPS.
The Assembly Stage shall be constructed in front of the signboard and made of
concrete. It shall consist of a raised platform 4.5 m x 1.0 m with at least one step.
The location of the signboard and stage shall be review by UNOPS. As and when
instructed by UNOPS, the Contractor shall remove or relocate and reconstruct the
signboard and stage, and reinstate all the affected ground to the satisfaction of UNOPS,
all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On substantial completion of the Works,
the signboard and stage shall be cleared away upon the review of UNOPS.
2.20 Safety Reflective Apparel (Traffic Control)

A worker designated to control traffic shall wear approved type of reflective apparel
during all hours of the day when so engaged.
2.21 Health Measures
2.21.1 Noise Management

The Contractor shall, as far as practicable, ensure that all processes, machines and
equipment used do not cause workers to be exposed to excessive noise, i.e. above an
equivalent sound level of 85 dBA for 8 hour workday. This can be done by
implementing one or more of the following measures:
GR-1 10-30
 Engineering noise control, e.g., modifying noisy processes, machines and

equipment, relocating noisy processes or isolating them within enclosures, erecting
sound barriers, reducing kinetic or potential energy and regularly maintaining
machines and equipment.
 Administrative noise control, e.g., rotating noisy jobs among workers so that they are
not exposed to noise above the permissible exposure limit.
 Using quiet machines and equipment when such machines and equipment are
available in the market. Examples are generators, compressors and concrete
breakers. The Contractor shall provide hearing protectors for workers who are
exposed to excessive noise and ensure that they are worn at all times. Warning
signs to remind workers that hearing protectors must be worn shall be put up at
areas with excessive noise.
 Contract workers should be trained and educated on the hazards of noise as well as
noise control and prevention.
2.21.2 First Aid

All workplaces as specified within the class or description shall establish and implement
a first-aid program to provide emergency treatment to victims of accidents, chemical
poisoning or excessive exposure to toxic substances. The program shall include:
 First-aid facilities;
 First-aid boxes;
 First-aid room, where there are 500 or more workers at site;
 First-aid treatment procedures;
 First aid for exposure to toxic or corrosive substances;
 Standard procedures;
 Maintenance of first-aid facilities.
All first-aid provisions shall comply with UNOPS Health & Safety (First-Aid) Regulations.
2.22 Fire Protection

At every level of construction where combustible materials are liable to be used or
stored, a 9 kg dry powder extinguisher shall be provided. Where the travel distance
exceeds 30 m, additional ones shall be provided. Two and a half kg extinguishers shall
be placed near switchboards. Trained personnel shall be available on the site at all
times. All workers at the site shall be trained to operate the extinguisher.
The fire alarm procedure and the evacuation sequence shall be clearly spelt out and the
workforce notified. In workplaces where fire hazards are potentially more hazardous,
drills shall be carried out.
Combustible and flammable materials shall be stored away from the source of heat such
as generators, welding sets and electrical distribution boxes.
2.23 Ventilation and Lighting

Enclosed workplaces in which there is a build-up of heat, dangerous gases or dust shall
be adequately ventilated.
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices and shops, where
work is in progress, shall be adequately lighted with either natural or artificial
illumination. Low voltage lighting is recommended.
GR- 110-3 1
2.24 Dust Elimination

The surfaces of haul and access roads shall be kept moist. Masks shall be provided to
the workers in concrete batching, mixing plant and in places where the cement is
handled.
2.25 Work in Confined Space

Where work is to be carried out in any confined space as defined in UNOPS, code of
practice for entry into and safe working in confined spaces shall be followed.
2.26 Demolition
Uncontrolled collapse of walls or other structures under demolition shall be prevented.
Walls and structures liable to collapse on workers shall be broken up gradually from the
top downwards. Scaffolds shall be provided to allow for this procedure.
Throwing of materials over the sides of the structure shall not be permitted. The dust
levels due to demolition shall be controlled. Special procedures shall be followed at sites
where dangerous materials, such as asbestos, are present.
The following actions shall be carried out before demolition is started:
 Disconnect all service lines e.g. gas, electricity and water.
 Fence off the building under demolition, providing a safety zone between the
building and the fencing as much as possible. Where required, hoardings shall be
provided.
 Remove glass pieces and sharp materials.
 Support structures that might collapse dangerously.
Waste materials shall be cleared and removed as demolition proceeds so as to prevent

overloading which might lead to a cascade of floor collapse. Where materials are
removed manually, rubbish chutes shall be installed. Where demolition is carried out
near public areas:
 Hoardings sloping inwards shall be erected around the building;
 Protective nettings shall be hung around the building to prevent materials falling
outside the periphery shelter.
Where asbestos materials are present, appropriate dust control and respiratory
protection approved by the local authority must be used.
2.27 Excavations
No person shall enter or be permitted to enter an excavation that does not comply with
this part.
Work shall not be performed in a trench unless another worker is working above ground
in close proximity to the trench or to the means of access to it.
The type of soil in which an excavation is made shall be determined by visual and
physical examination of the soil at the walls of the excavation and within a horizontal
distance from each wall equal to the depth of the excavation measured away from the
excavation.
Before an excavation is begun, gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to
be excavated shall be accurately located and marked. If a service may pose a hazard,
the service shall be shut off and disconnected.
An excavation in which a worker may work shall have a clear work space of at least 450
mm between the wall of the excavation and any formwork or masonry or similar wall.
GR-1 10-32
The walls of an excavation shall be stripped of loose rock or other material that may
slide, roll or fall upon a worker.
A level area extending at least one meter from the upper edge of each wall of an
excavation shall be kept clear of equipment, excavated soil, rock and construction
material.
The stability of a wall of an excavation shall be maintained where it may be affected by
stockpiling excavated soil or rock or construction materials.
No person shall operate a vehicle or other machine and no vehicle or other machine
shall be located in such a way as to affect the stability of a wall of an excavation.
If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 2.4 m deep, a barrier at least
1.1 m high shall be provided at the top of every wall of the excavation that is not sloped.
Where the excavation is a trench and the depth exceeds six m or the width exceeds 3.6
m, a support system consisting of either timber or of an engineered support system
designed for the specific location and project shall be installed.
2.28 Welding, Riveting and Cutting

Welding and cutting operations shall be done by workmen thoroughly trained for the job
or trainees who are under competent supervision. Workers engaged in welding, riveting
and cutting shall be provided with protective clothing, hand gloves, sleeves and boots as
per relevant Indian Standards. Workers engaged in welding and cutting shall be
provided with protective goggles.
2.29 Painting
Paints containing lead or lead products shall not be used. Facemasks shall be supplied
to workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or when a surface having lead
paint is dry rubbed and scrapped.
As most paint materials are highly combustible, every precaution shall be taken to
eliminate danger from fire. Packages containing paints, varnishes, lacquers or other
volatile painting materials shall be kept tightly closed when not in actual use and shall
be placed where they shall not be exposed to excessive heat, spark, flame or direct rays
of the sun.
2.30 Electrical Works

Where work to be carried out involves electricity/power, installing temporary wiring,
usage of power tools and equipment, no worker shall connect, maintain or modify
electrical tools, equipment or installation unless the worker is a qualified electrician.
The Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to prevent hazards to workers
from energized electrical equipment, installations and conductors. No person, other than
a person authorized to do so by the Contractor, shall enter or be permitted to enter a
room or other enclosure containing exposed energized electrical parts. The entrance to
a room or other enclosure containing exposed energized electrical parts shall be marked
by conspicuous warning signs stating that entry by unauthorized persons is prohibited.
All electrical equipment, installations, conductors and insulating materials shall be
suitable for their intended use and shall be installed, maintained, modified and operated
so as not to pose a hazard to a worker. The Contractor shall use mats, shields or other
protective devices or equipment, including personal protective equipment, adequate to
protect the worker from electrical shock and burns.
2.31 Control of Traffic

If vehicle traffic at the construction site is dangerous to workers, pedestrians and school
children on foot, the Contractor and his workers must ensure that the traffic movement is
controlled to protect against accident related injuries and fatalities. The Contractor must
GR- 110-3 3
designate a worker to control traffic on the construction site and must ensure that the
designated traffic controller wears a reflective vest, safety footwear and hard hat.
The passage of vehicles across a footpath shall be supervised to remove danger to the
school children and the public.
The Contractor and his workers must be vigilant at all times and must ensure that
pedestrians and school children do not cross the safety barriers and enter the
construction site.
2.32 Occupational Health and Environmental Controls
Shelter from adverse weather conditions shall be provided. Toilet facilities shall be
provided and maintained in a clean condition. Washing facilities with running water shall
be provided. Potable drinking water shall be provided. Food supplies of adequate quality
shall be available or provided in canteens on site.
All rest areas, canteens toilets and washing facilities shall be adequate in number,
convenient to the work areas and kept clean, well lit and ventilated. Toilet facilities shall
be easily accessible, especially to those working on very tall buildings. Adequate
facilities shall be provided for the changing drying and storing of clothing. Waste
disposal bins shall be provided for the disposal of garbage.
All workers shall be checked by the foreman before being hired to make sure they are
physically capable of the work and are free from obvious signs of sickness. Workers
who have to work at heights shall be checked by the foreman before starting work each
day. Any worker showing signs of sickness shall not be allowed to work at heights.
2.33 Others
The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards, fences or barriers around the
construction site, excavations, lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to
prevent accidents. The guards, fences and barriers shall be of sound material, good
construction and possess adequate strength.
3. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
In the event of contravention or non-compliance with the safety specifications, UNOPS

shall suspend the progress of works or any part of them if necessary for the safety of the
works or if he is of the opinion that the working environment or procedure is unsafe for
the works to continue. In such an event, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any
claims for compensation or extension of time for completion.
No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section.
It is deemed that all the cost for above requirements are covered under appropriate unit
prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
GR-1 10-34
Appendix I
Form for Undertaking Safety Provision By Contractor
Project Manager
United Nations Office for Project Services
Copy: UNOPS Health & Safety Officer
Modernization and Improvement of Policing Project in Nepal
RE: SAFETY PROVISIONS AT ___________________________________
I, __________________________________ of
_______________________________________
(Name of Managing Director) (Name of Company)
I/C No: __________________ understand that as the Contractor of /for the above worksite /
work area or order, it is my duty and responsibility to ensure that the provisions of UNOPS
Health & Safety Policy & Procedures, and any amendments or re-enactments thereto are
complied with.
(Managing Director) (Signature)
(Name of Company / Company Stamp (Date)
GR- 110-3 5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
1. GENERAL
Some generic environmental impacts can be expected during the construction of the
project structures. These impacts can be mitigated by the measures contained in this
section so that the works are performed in conformity with national environmental
standards.
2. LANDSCAPE AND VISUAL QUALITY

Impacts
a. Deterioration of visual quality of surrounding landscape and buildings due to the
following:
 Generally stark appearance of under-construction building.
 Unmanaged heaping of construction material and wastes, resulting in a cluttered
site.
Mitigation Measures
a. Maintain construction site free from rubbish.
b. Conduct regular housekeeping to include removal of rubbish, construction waste and
proper storage of construction material.
3. AIR QUALITY
Impacts
Impacts on local air quality due to the following factors:
a. Fugitive dust generation in and around the construction area from earthworks,
demolition, stockpiles, etc.
b. Generation of diesel exhaust from heavy equipment and generators.
Mitigation Measures
a. Remove spoil/muck from construction sites at the earliest practicable.
b. Cover loose materials (sand, aggregates, etc.) and muck/spoil at stockpiles and
during their transportation.
c. Regularly sprinkle water in construction area to minimize dust generation.
d. Keep surrounding environment free of debris.
e. Prohibit open burning of construction / waste material at the site.
f. Provide PPE (masks, etc.) to workers, engineers and supervisors at construction
sites.
g. Ensure that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good operating condition.
h. Ensure that all project vehicles comply with national emission standards.
i. Prohibit excessive idling of construction vehicles at site.
j. Ensure proper collection and disposal of sewerage and solid wastes in camps,
offices and work areas.
4. SURFACE WATER
Impacts
Construction activities can result in:
GR-1 00-36
a. Increased turbidity of runoff water due to soil erosion.

b. Increase in hardscaping, with a resulting incremental increase in surface water
runoff.
c. Contamination of runoff due to leaking fuel or lubricants from construction
equipment.
Mitigation Measures
a. Prevent soil erosion by careful grading of the construction site so that significant
amounts of water are not allowed run off from the site into adjacent drainages.
b. Where excavated soils are stored on site, implement adequate measures, including
covering exposed soils, construction of settling basins or erection of physical
barriers, to control runoff.
c. Provide fuel storage with adequate containment measures to capture spills.
d. Minimize generation of oil and lubricants, debris and any form of waste (particularly
petroleum and chemical wastes) and prevent their entry into waterways.
e. Maintain machinery and equipment in good working condition and inspect regularly
for leaks.
f. Conduct maintenance of equipment or machinery onsite only over non-permeable
areas with adequate containment measures to capture spills.
g. Avoid accumulation of oil wastes in depressions to avoid contamination of the
ground water system.
h. Store spent lubricants and unused toxic chemicals separately in plastic drums in a
safe and shaded place and discharge them as approved.
5. GROUND WATER
Impacts
a. Contamination of runoff due to leaking fuel or lubricants from construction equipment
and fuel stores.
b. Incremental decrease in groundwater percolation due to increase in hardscaping.
Mitigation Measures
a. Implement all measures under item 4 above.
b. Use of paving with pervious joints (e.g. concrete blocks) to allow surface water
percolation.
6. NOISE
Impacts
a. Noise pollution from the use of heavy construction equipment and machinery.
Mitigation Measures
a. Ensure that all processes, machines and equipment implement one or more of the
following measures:
 Engineering noise control, e.g., modifying noisy processes, machines and
equipment, relocating noisy processes or isolating them within enclosures,
erecting sound barriers, reducing kinetic or potential energy and regularly
maintaining machines and equipment.
 Using quiet machines and equipment (generators, compressors and concrete
breakers) when such machines and equipment are available in the market.
 Provide hearing protectors for workers who are exposed to excessive noise and
ensure that they are worn at all times.
 Install warning signs in areas with excessive noise to remind workers that
hearing protectors must be worn.
GR- 110-3 7
b. To the extent practicable, conduct construction activities during normal working

times. Where necessary, conduct short duration operations after advance
coordination with the project team and nearby inhabitants.
c. Implement a community outreach program to ensure that local residents are aware
of the purpose of the construction activities and have an opportunity to report any
impacts.
7. SOLID, HAZARDOUS AND SPECIAL WASTES

Impacts
a. Solid waste generation from construction activities, including demolition and
excavation.
b. Contamination through accidental spillage or unearthing of hazardous or special
wastes on the project sites.
Mitigation Measures
a. Transport solid wastes off site and dispose of in a disposal site previously approved
by the relevant authority.
b. Cease all construction activities in the event any buried hazardous wastes are
uncovered during excavation.
8. TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION

Impacts
a. Additional truck traffic and potential traffic congestion on local streets/roads.
b. Potential threat to pedestrian safety due to additional traffic.
Mitigation Measures
a. Scheduled delivery of materials and equipment to the site during periods of light
traffic (e.g. early morning or late afternoon).
b. Where necessary, provide pedestrian access-way improvements, including
sidewalks, fencing, or alternate routes, and prior to commencing construction
activities.
c. Provide flagmen and other traffic control measures to avoid conflicts between
construction traffic and other vehicles and /or pedestrians.
9. UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE
Impacts
a. Loss of life or limb from disturbance to or handling of unexploded ordnance (UXO)
uncovered during construction.
Mitigation Measures
a. Immediately vacated and secured area where a potential UXO is identified and notify
qualified and authorized disposal organization to dispose it.
b. Conduct excavation below the depth or outside the area that has already been
cleared only after approval from relevant authorities.
c. Provide onsite UXO safety training to all workers on identifying potential UXO and
the appropriate response.
10. TERRESTRIAL AND AQUATIC ECOLOGY

Impacts
a. Loss of trees and vegetation due to:
 Cleaning and grubbing for construction.
 Increased demand for fuel wood for cooking and other purposes by Contractor’s
workforce.
GR-1 10-38
b. Loss of terrestrial and aquatic animals due to:

 Ground contamination by fuel spills, etc.
 Increased turbidity in water courses/bodies due to soil erosion and contamination
due to fuel spills, etc.
 Hunting and fishing by workforce.
Mitigation Measures
a. Selective and absolutely mandatory cutting and/or removal of trees, after prior
approval from UNOPS.
b. Provision of alternative means of cooking, such as kerosene or electric stoves, to
workforce.
c. Prohibit hunting and fishing in and around construction site.
d. Create awareness amongst workforce regarding importance of ecology
conservation.
11. SOCIOECONOMICS
Impacts
a. Influx of large number of skilled and semi-skilled workers into the project area,
resulting in conflict of interest between locals and migrants, deterioration of law and
order, gambling, increased alcohol consumption, prostitution, etc.
b. Generation of employment and small business opportunities for local residents.
c. Skill and capability enhancement of local workmen and residents.
Mitigation Measures
a. Create awareness on need for good social habits amongst migrant works and strict
monitoring of their activities.
b. Good coordination with local security agencies, stakeholders and residents to
maintain security and social harmony.
c. Priority to local employment and local skill development.
12. CULTURAL
Impacts
a. Uncovering of buried cultural or archaeological resources during construction
activities.
Mitigation Measures
a. Immediately cease construction activities in the area where cultural or
archaeological resources are unearthed.
b. Contact appropriate government office for necessary action and authorization for
further construction.

No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. It
is deemed that all the costs for above requirements are covered under appropriate unit
prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
GR- 110-3 9
SITE MEETINGS
1. WEEKLY SITE MEETINGS
The Contractor’s senior site representative shall report weekly to the Engineer on the
status of each activity planned for the period under consideration and to review
construction progress and consider matters arising from or having a bearing on the
Contract.
2. MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS
Generally, at monthly intervals during the Contract or at shorter or longer intervals as

project conditions dictate, or as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor’s senior
head office representative and others shall report to the Employer and the Engineer, at
site progress meetings, which will be held to review construction progress and consider
matters arising from or having a bearing on the Contract. The agenda for each meeting
will be prepared and issued by the Engineer.
3. ATTENDANCE
The Contractor’s senior site representative shall attend each meeting, together with
such other members of its staff as may be required. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for the attendance of representatives of its sub-contractors and suppliers.
4. COST
No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for the works under this section. It
is deemed that the costs for these works are covered under appropriate unit prices
tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
GR-1 10-40
DEMOBILIZATION
1. GENERAL
This Section covers the works to be performed by the Contractor prior to demobilizing
from the Site. All of these works shall be performed to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
2. FINAL CLEANING
Before handing over the site to the Employer, the Contractor shall clean the entire
building, including its interior and exterior surfaces. He shall clear all construction
wastes debris from the site and dispose them at an approved location in an acceptable
manner. He shall also remove surplus materials from the Site.
3. REINSTATEMENT
The Contractor shall clean and repair any damage caused to the Site by the installation
or use of any temporary works by him. He shall restore existing facilities that were used
during construction to their original condition.
4. CONDITION-OUT SURVEY
Following reinstatement, the Engineer and Contractor shall conduct a condition-out

survey to identify damages caused to any pre-existing temporary or permanent on-site
property by the Contractor during the execution of his works. The Contractor shall repair
such damages at his own cost in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Alternatively,
the Engineer may deduct the cost of such repairs from the Contractor’s final invoice.
5. ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Engineer, Contractor and owners/occupants of adjoining properties whose

conditions were recorded prior to commencement of construction shall inspect these
properties and recording any damage that has occurred to them since the pre-
commencement inspection. Any damage thus identified shall be repaired by the
Contractor at his own cost in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Alternatively, the
Engineer may deduct the cost of such repairs from the Contractor’s final invoice.
6. DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Engineer after completion of
the construction:
 Material test certificates
 As-built drawings
 Warranty statements
 List of suppliers with their contact information
 Spare materials, where applicable.
GR- 110-4 1
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R L A B O R A T O R Y LAB F ACI L I T I ES
7. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS AND PLANTS
Within ten working days of handover, the Contractor shall remove from the site
temporary works and construction plants no longer required at the Site. However, he
shall be allowed to retain at the Site those temporary works and construction plants that
may be required by him for the purpose of fulfilling his obligations during the Defects
Liability Period.
No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for the works under this section. It
is deemed that the costs for these works are covered under appropriate unit prices
tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
GR-1 10- 42
B - SPECIFICATION FOR FURNITURE
WORKS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURNITURES SECTION FS-100
FURNITURES AND FURNISHING WORKS
Note:
1. Product with ISI stamp shall have to be provided where available (in case of non-availability of
such stamping for a particular product UNOPS decision as per list of material or otherwise shall
be final & binding)
2. The contractor shall prepare shop drawings based upon provided drawings and get prior approval
before final fabrication & commissioning for the furniture related works.
3. The materials shall be got approved by the UNOPS before making any procurement samples of
all approved materials shall be submitted to the UNOPS for reference. The material supplied shall
be of same quality of the approved sample and will be compared/checked at site before installation
and also during execution of work. The materials will be rejected in totality for any defect/deviation
in quality and the same shall be replaced by the Contractor at his cost as per satisfaction of the
UNOPS.
1.0 WOOD WORK

1.1 Teak Wood:
Wood shall be of the Indian 2nd class quality teak wood for frame work and best quality teak wood
for all exposed portions. It should be well seasoned and free from sap, knots, warps, cracks and
other defects conforming to IS Code of Practice. All wood work shall be planned neatly and truly
finished to the exact dimension. All joints shall be neat and strong, truly and accurately fitted and
glued before being fitted together.
1.2 Plywood:
The marine ply wood shall conform to the IS: 710 of latest edition. It shall be phenol formaldehyde
bonded, borer proof, exterior grade suitable for intended use. The contractor shall submit samples
to the office of UNOPS for approval before procurement. Fire redundant quality plywood shall
conform to IS: 5509 of latest edition.
1.3 Veneered Decorative Plywood:
The veneered decorative plywood shall conform to type-1 of IS 1328 of latest edition. It shall be
bonded with synthetic resin adhesive, borer proof suitable for intended use. Decorative veneer shall
be rotary cut or sliced not more than 1 mm thick. The contractor shall submit samples to the office
of UNOPS for approval before procurement.
1.4 Commercial Block Board:
Commercial block board conforming to IS 1659/1979 bonded with phenol formaldehyde synthetic
resin of IS 840/1974 of approved make should be used.
1.5 Decorative Laminates:
FS-100- 43
Laminate sheets shall be 1 mm (as per design requirements or as specified in the respective items)
thick with +0.3 mm tolerance and obtained from any of the following approved manufacturers e.g.
Merino, Century and Greenlam & samples should have approval of the UNOPS. The laminates shall
be resistant to chemicals for the granite top lab tables, wall hung/overhead chemical cabinets,
chemical storage cabinet and shall conform to the quality and standards as of Merino or equivalent
as directed by the UNOPS Engineer.
1.6 Hardware Fittings:
All hardware fittings for doors shall be either brass or as specified in the schedule of quantities. These
hardware fittings shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall bear ISI mark wherever
available. The samples for the fittings shall be submitted to UNOPS for their approval. Hardware
fittings for door shutters shall be paid in door shutter item or separately as given in schedule of
quantities. No separate payment shall be made for hardware fittings if not mentioned otherwise in
the schedule of quantities. The rate for hardware fittings shall include for supplying, fitting and fixing
the fittings with necessary cadmium plated screws, washers bolts, nuts etc. as required. All locks
shall be provided with keys in duplicate/triplicate and rate shall include for the same. Approved
samples of hardware fittings shall be deposited with UNOPS for reference.
1.7 Workmanship:
a) The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of UNOPS. Scantlings and board shall
be accurately sawn and shall be of required width and thickness. All carpenter's work shall be
wrought except where otherwise described. The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out
in strict conformity according to the drawings and shall be framed together and securely fixed in
approved manner and with properly made joints. All work is to be properly tanned shouldered,
wedged, pinned, braced etc. and properly glued with approved quality glue to the satisfaction of
UNOPS/Engineer.
b) Screws: Unless otherwise specified all screws to be used in woodwork and joinery shall be of
cadmium plated and of approved quality. The size (diameter and length) should conform to those
specified in hardware schedule.
c) Tolerance: l.5 mm (l/l6") will be allowed for each wrought face of sizes specified except where
described as finished in which case they shall hold to the full dimensions.
d) Protection: All edges of timber frames etc. shall be protected from being damaged during
construction by providing rough timber casing securely fixed and other adequate protective
measures.
e) Door/Windows frames shall have cut rebate. Planted rebates shall not be permitted.
f) Where door frames are fixed flush with plaster to wall, teak wood cover mould 40 x l2 mm as per
drawings shall be provided all round and shall be painted or polish finished to match with finished
shutters. This will be paid as a separate item as described in Schedule of Quantities.
1.8 Rates to Include Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract the rate for item
of wood work and joinery shall include for the following :-
A. Items of Scantling i) All labour, materials and equipments for fixing frame work as per drawing
including the cost of holdfasts, Rawl plugs, or other fasteners etc.
FS-100- 44
B. Items of Shutters i) All labour, materials, hardware fittings and equipments for carrying out the
work as per drawing. ii) Labour for fixing the shutters in position (including/excluding the cost of
fittings as specified in the BOQ) as per drawing.
1.9 Mode of Measurement:
All measurements shall be as per relevant section of I.S. l200 of latest edition.
i) Scantling shall be measured in cum. The sectional area shall be the area of the least square, or
rectangles from which the scantling may be cut. The length shall be actual length of timber required
for the purposes including the extra portion required for jointing.
ii) Shutter shall be measured in square metre for closed door shutters area i.e. rebate to rebate
without extra measurement for rebates and/or splayed meeting styles of door.
iii) Partitions, encasing shall be measured in square metre of the finished work. For full height
partition no payment shall be made for additional frame work extended upto ceiling for rigidity of the
same. 2.0
PARTITIONS
2.1 Frame Work Modular Partitions will have a thickness of minimum 70 mm and the width and
height will be as per drawing & specifications. The vertical members will be made from
C.R.C.A/Aluminum tubes and the horizontal members from C.R.C.A/Aluminum frames. Low height
partitions will be free standing and self-supporting. In full height partitions, the vertical members will
be jacked under tension to the main ceiling/beam bottom (as the case may be). Both, low height and
full height partitions will be provided with levelling systems to adjust the partitions to unevenness and
differences in floor and ceiling levels.
2.2 Skirting Low Height Partitions will be provided with a box type skirting raceways for wire
management, either along the base and/or at table height as per drawing. The skirting will have a
height of minimum 128 mm and will be fabricated out of 0.8 mm CRCA sheet. There will be an
openable cover on both side for easy access to carry out electrical installations and maintenance. In
full height partitions, the skirting cover will have a height of minimum 128 mm. The skirting will be
approachable from both sides and will have channels for adjustment for floors. Box type raceway
can be provided at table height.
2.3 Finishes Partitions and Doors are available within fill panels in the following finishes:
a) P.F bonded exterior grade Prelaminated board of minimum 9 mm thickness (on both sides)
b) Fabric cladded soft board of minimum 12 mm thickness (on both sides)
c) Glass of minimum 6 mm thick toughened float glass as specified.
d) Stainless steel/Brass screws of approved size & make. Various combinations of the above finishes
on either side can be provided as specified by the UNOPS/Engineer. All the in-fill panels in doors
and partitions are fitted by using aluminum profiles and PVC extrusions are used as trimmings.
Phenol formaldehyde bonded exterior grade. Prelaminated boards shall be of any shade as per
drawing and direction. All metal sections, fabricated M.S components and aluminum profiles are
FS-100- 45
finished in epoxy powder coating of a thickness 50 microns. The standard shades are Grey, Black
and Brown or as specified by UNOPS Engineer.
Table for brief specification for furniture and furnishing related works
S.No. Items Model/size/thickness Approved Make Origin Remarks
1 Reception Counter: Factory Made Veneer century

1mm century/greenlam T873. teak veneer Nepal/India
laminate finishing and in India ,Laminate
side19mm Block board Century/green
with both side century
T873.teak veneer and
melamine matt finish.
heavy SS sliding
channel mechanism
and safari lock
2 Back closed filing Factory Made Veneer century T873
cabinet with 19mm India Nepal/India
Block board with both
side century T873.teak
veneer and melamine
matt finish 3'-6" x 6'-6" x
1"-3" Depth
3 Revolving chair: Thick GA 559 Geeken, India or India
Padded Contoured Equivalent
Fabric/PU Seat and
Mesh Back with Lumbar
Support. Pneumatic
Seat Height
Adjustment.. Locking
Tilt Control Mechanism.
. Heavy Duty Nylon/SS
Base with Dual Wheel
Casters.
- Multilock Knee-Tilt
Mechanism
- Stainless steel
Chrome Base/Nylon
with adjustable
hydraulic.
- Fine soft plastic on
armrest
- Black Fabric/PU on
seat.
FS-100- 46
- High quality black net

finished on back MAKE:
Geeken, India
4 PVC Cut floor carpet 1.5mm thick Korea or

Equivalent
5 Hard wood frame with Factory Made Sagun
both side 6mm ply and /Century/Greenlam Nepal/India
1mm century/green
laminate finishing frame
for Partition works
6 Sofa. The work includes Factory Made Mango wood frame, Nepal
mango wood frame. 50 density foam,
Double belt system seat good quality fabric
frame with 50 density
foam and super density
foam at back and good
quality fabric ( 3 seated
and 2 seated)
7 Office table of different Factory Made Veneer century T873
specified sizes with or India ,Laminate Nepal/India
without side unit tables Century/green
(with 4 Nos drawers of Block board Century/
1'-6" wx2'-4" hx 2'-0" Green
wide )with heavy SS
sliding channel
mechanism and safari
lock
8 Conference/meeting Factory Made Veneer century T873
table of size 600 x 1200 India ,Laminate Nepal/India
x 750 (2'-0" x4'-0"x 2'-6" Century/green
)with open paper holder Block board Century/
Green
9 1'-6" height deck/stage Hard Wood Frame Nepal

in 8'x 19'-5" in and Sagun/shikhar
conference room board
FS-100- 47
10 Chemical rack center 14" wide 2'-0" ht Block board

portion of lab table for Century/green and
both side usable lamination Merino or
including 12mm Equivalent
beveled edge polish
glass self and partition
with stand chemical
resistant paint member
11 Granite table top Island Size as of the drawing Block board
type chemical lab of layout and detailed Century/green and
under table drawer and drawings. lamination Merino or
shutter up to 33" ht and Equivalent
2'-0" depth , inside and
outside 1mm lamination
, edge finishing of
chemical proof paints,
drawer use good quality
runner, hinges, good
quality magnet
12 Wall hung chemical 2'-0" ht x1'-4 " depth, Block board
glazed cabinet with 2'-0" ht x 1'-0" depth, Century/green and
12mm glass shelves & 2’-0' ht x1'-2 “depth. lamination Merino or
shutter ( BB board of Length may vary lab Equivalent
19mm thk both side to lab refer the layout
laminated) drawing.
13 Providing of without Model No: GV 606 Geeken Brand or
hand rest visitor’s type equivalent.
chair (Ref. photo
attached)
14 Chemical storage Factory Made/3'- Block board

cabinet of BB board 3"wx6'-6"hx 1'-9" Century/Green/Surya,
inside and outside 1mm block board thickness Laminate Merino or
thk laminate and glazed 19 mm equivalent
shutter
FS-100- 48
APPROVED MAKES FOR VARIOUS MATERIALS IN WOOD WORK:
(1) : TEAKWOOD/STEAM BEACH : Only Seasoned Timber to be used.
FOR EXTERNAL USE : 1ST quality Ghana Teak/Steam beach Wood, as suggested in details
specifications brown in color without knots, joints & bend wood.
FOR INTERNAL USE : 1ST quality C.P.Teak Wood/Steam beach, as suggested in detail
specifications without knots, joints & bend wood.
FOR WOODEN MOLDING : 1st quality of either Ghana Teak Wood or C.P.Wood/Steam beach as
specified in detail specifications of each item.
FOR LEAPING/BORDER : 1st quality Steam beach or C.P.wood as suggested in detail

specifications.
(2) : BLOCK BOARDS/PLYWOOD : Water Proof Century, Surya-, Greenply-Ecotech,
(3) : LAMINATES : Merino, Greenlam, Century, -Color, finish suggested by the UNOPS.
1.5MM/1mm thickness (I.S.I.MARK)
(4): HARDWARE-LCOKS : AS APPROVAL –GODREJ DRAWER SLIDE : EBCO,

OZONE,HETTICH,OR AS PER INSTRUCTION
A : ADHESIVES : Fevicol *SH*
B : DOORSTOP : Ebco-Efficient Gadgets-Sergeant-Brown in color.
C : HINGES FOR DOOR : S.S. with S.S. pin, Heavy Duty – on approval- Sizes:5”x1”x1”.
D : STOPPERS FOR DOORS : S.S. matt finish – on approval – 6” & 8” size as suggested.
E : HANDLES FOR DOORS : S.S. matt finish – 6” Size on design approval (Kich or Eq.)
F : SCREW : NETTLE FOLD *GKW*
G : FLOOR SPRING : Hyper-Heavy-Sterling-Ozone Duty /Sterling /Ozone / Eq.
H : DOOR CLOSER : Godrej / Everlite / Sterling / Ozone / Eq
(5) : POLISH : Asian Mealamine, N.C.clear Lacquer polish as specified in detailed specifications.
(6) : ALUMINIUM SECTIONS : JINDAL of suggested gauge / thickness.
(7) : POWDER COATING : 55 Micron – shade & finish (7 tank process) as suggested by Architect.
(8) : GLASS : Saint gobain, Ashai,Modi
FS-100- 49
Photo: Visitor’s chair w/o hand rest – Photo: Revolving chair Model GA 559
model GV 606
FS-100- 50
C - SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS
Table of Contents
Section CS-010: Clearing and Grubbing ----------------------------------------------------------Page 51-52

Section CS-020: Earth Work---------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 53-59
Section CS-030: Fill Placement---------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 60-63
Section CS-040: Cement Concrete Works--------------------------------------------------------Page 64-93
Section CS-050: Concrete Reinforcement -------------------------------------------------------Page 94-96
Section CS-060: Form Work for RCC Work------------------------------------------------------Page 97-99
Section CS-070: Brick Masonry Work-------------------------------------------------------------Page 100-103
Section CS-080: Interlocking Pavement Block-------------------------------------------------Page 104-105
Section CS-090: Aluminum Doors and Windows---------------------------------------------Page 106-109
Section CS-100: Tiling---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 110-114

Section CS-120: Plaster Work----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 115-119
Section CS-130: Landscaping----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 120-122
Section CS-140: Barbed Wire Fence Work-----------------------------------------------------Page 123-124
Section CS-150: Chain Link Fence Work-------------------------------------------------------Page 125-126
Section CS-160: Gypsum Board False Ceiling-----------------------------------------------Page 127-128
S E CT I ON C S- 0 1 0
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section of the Specification covers the clearing and grubbing of construction sites in
preparation for excavation and subsequent construction, as defined hereunder:
a. Areas to be cleared shall include the entire foundation areas for building(s),
pavements, access roads and other permanent structures.
b. Areas to be grubbed, in addition to being cleared, shall include the foundation areas
for building(s), pavements, access roads and other permanent structures.
1.2 Definitions
The various terms covered under this section are defined below:
Top soil Surface layer of undisturbed natural soil that is rich in organic nutrients and
supports the growth of vegetation. Generally, the surface layer of soil to a
depth of 500 mm shall be considered to be top soil.
2. EXECUTION
2.1 Clearing
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, clearing shall extend to a line 1.5 m
horizontal distance outside the limits of the respective structures. Other areas shall be
cleared to the limits directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall remove all shrubs, vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and
saplings of girth up to 30 cm measured at a height of 1 m above ground, fences,
debris, floatable materials, litter and similar matters from the areas specified to be
cleared. Trees of girth above 30 cm measured at a height of 1 m above ground shall
be cut only after written permission of the Engineer. Special care shall be taken to
preserve all vegetation outside the cleared areas to the maximum practicable extent.
The Contractor shall dispose of the cleared materials at a distance of 50 m outside the
periphery of the area under clearance. The disposed materials shall not be pushed or
felled into areas not designated to be cleared.
2.2 Grubbing
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, grubbing shall extend to a line minimum of 1
m outside the foundation or excavation lines. It shall consist of removal and disposal of
all tree stumps, including the tap roots, and all lateral roots exceeding 38 mm diameter
to a depth of 60 cm below ground level or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm
below subgrade level, whichever is lower, and filling up, ramming and leveling of holes
or hollows with earth. Grubbing shall also include removal of any buried logs, posts or
other organic materials. Vegetation other than grasses shall also be removed from
grubbed areas so that topsoil may be salvaged for reuse.
2.3 Strip and Stockpile Topsoil

After grubbing, areas containing suitable material for topsoil, as determined by the
Engineer, shall be stripped of topsoil to the depths determined by the Engineer, and the
C S- 01 0 - 5 1
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S C L E AR I N G A N D G R U B B I N G
top soil shall be stockpiled in separate piles at locations determined by the Engineer for
later use in the Works. This activity shall be paid for as excavation. The stockpiles shall
be sloped to drain and located in areas where they will not be lost to erosion. Upon
completion of the Works, the stripped material shall be spread in locations as instructed
by the Engineer.
2.4 Disposal of Materials

Disposal of materials shall be carried out as rapidly as clearing progresses and weather
conditions permit. Before any burning is performed, permits to burn shall be obtained
from authorities having jurisdiction in the area. The Engineer shall also be notified at
least 24 hours before burning is started. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
accidental fires or spread of fires, including provision of watchmen and standby fire-
fighting equipment meeting approval of authorities having jurisdiction in the area.
All material from clearing and grubbing that is left in the area and is not burned
completely to ashes shall be buried. Where the Drawings show slopes to be mulched,
cleared brush and branches may be reduced to small pieces not exceeding 100 mm
maximum dimension by shredding with chippers and used for mulching.
Materials disposed of by burial shall be buried in worked out borrow areas or by piling
the cleared material on the ground surface and covering the piles with not less than 1 m
of earth. Before being covered, tree branches, shrubs or similar loose materials shall be
consolidated to a dense mass not greater than 5 m high by shredding with chippers or
by cat-tracking the piles. Buried piles shall not obstruct natural drainage.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, stumps shall be buried within designated
disposal areas conforming to the following guidelines:
a. Stumps shall be placed not more than three layers deep, one stump being
considered as the thickness of one layer.
b. There shall be a minimum thickness of 0.3 m of earth material between stumps
deposited so as to minimize the formation of voids.
c. Where there will be more than one layer of stumps, a minimum of 0.3 m of earth
materials shall be compacted over that layer before placing another layer.
d. A minimum of 1.5 m final cover of rock fill shall be dumped and spread out over the
entire stump disposal area and compacted in 0.4 m layers.
e. The lateral or side slope coverage shall contain a minimum of 1.5 m of rock fill over
the outermost stumps and organic material.
f. The compaction required on the fill material between layers and the final cover of
rock fill shall consist of routing the hauling equipment over each layer in a manner to
distribute and effectively utilize the compactive effort of the equipment over the fill.
3.1 Measurement
Measurement for payment for clearing and grubbing shall be made of the area, in
square meters, of the area cleared and grubbed, as measured in the field and agreed
upon between the Engineer and the Contractor. Dimensions shall be measured nearest
to 10 mm, and individual quantities shall be calculated correct to two places of decimals
of a square meter.
3.2 Payment
Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of
Quantities. The unit rate shall include the costs of labor, equipment, any materials,
stockpiling and disposal as specified in this section and BOQ description.
CS-01 0-52
EARTHWORK IN SOIL
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section of the Specifications covers the earthwork in excavation for all types of
foundations, wet or dry. It covers earthwork in all types of soils, including sand, gravel,
loam, clay, mud, black cotton and other similar soft or loose material. It includes all
materials of earthy or sandy nature that can be easily ploughed, small shingles, gravels
and river shingles that can be easily removed and hard core macadam surface of any
description (water bound, grouted tarmac, etc.), lime concrete, mud concrete and their
mixtures which for excavation yields to application of picks, shovels, jumper, scarifier,
ripper and other manual digging implements. Removal of small boulders not exceeding
3,000 cc occurring in such strata shall be included in the rate of the excavation.
1.2 Definitions
The various types of excavations covered under this section are defined below:
Surface excavation Excavations exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 sq. m on plan
but not exceeding 30 cm in depth
Rough excavation Excavation for earth from borrow pits, cutting hill side slopes,
etc.
Excavation over  Excavation exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 sq. m on plan
Area and exceeding 30 cm in depth.
 Excavation for basements, water tanks, etc.
 Excavation in trenches exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 sq.
m on plan.
Trench excavation Excavation not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 sq. m on plan
for foundations and and to any depth in trenches (excluding trenches for pipes,
drains cables, conduits etc.)
Trench excavation Excavation not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 sq. m in plan and
for pipes, cables, to any depth trenches for pipes. Cables etc.
etc.
1.3 Standards and Codes

Works related to excavation shall be performed in conformity with the following
standards and codes of practice:
a. IS 1200 (Part 1): 1992 – Building and Civil Engineering Works, Part 1: Earth Work.
b. IS 1200 (Part 27): 1992 – Method of Measurement of Earth Work, Part 27: Earth
Work Done by Mechanical Appliances
c. IS 3764: 1992 – Code of Safety for Excavation Work
2. EXECUTION
2.1 Setting Out and Making Profiles

A masonry pillar to serve as a benchmark will be erected at a suitable point in the
area that is visible from the largest area. The benchmark shall be connected to the
C S- 02 0 - 5 3
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S E ART H W OR K I N S OI L
standard benchmark as approved by the Engineer. Necessary profiles with strings

stretched on pegs shall be made to indicate the correct formation levels before the
work is started. The Contractor shall supply labour and material for constructing the
benchmark, setting out and making profiles and connecting it with the standard
benchmark at his own cost. The pegs and the benchmark shall be maintained by
the Contractor at his own cost during the excavation to check the profiles.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer before starting excavation to enable the latter to
take ground levels for purposes of measurements before the ground is disturbed.
Ground levels shall be taken at 5 to 15 m intervals, as directed by the Engineer, in
uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local mounds, pits or
undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in field books and
plotted on plans. The plans shall be drawn to a 1:50 scale or any other suitable
scale decided by the Engineer. The north direction line and position of benchmark
shall invariable be shown on the plans. These plans shall be signed by the Contractor
and the Engineer, or their authorized representatives, before the earthwork is started.
The labour required for taking levels shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own
cost.
2.2 Excavation
All excavation operations, whether conducted manually or by mechanical means,
shall include excavation and ‘getting out’ the excavated materials. In case of
excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks, etc., ‘getting out’ shall include
throwing the excavated materials at a distance of at least one m or half the depth of
excavation, whichever is more, clear off the edge of the excavation. In all other
cases, ‘getting out’ shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The
subsequent disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate
item or included with the items of excavation stating the lead.
During the excavation, the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained.
Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not be
done.
The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Only the excavation shown on the Drawings
with additional allowances for centering and shuttering or as required by the Engineer
shall be measured and recorded for payment.
The elevations of the foundation bottom shown on the Drawings shall be considered as
approximate only, and changes in the dimensions and elevations of the foundation as
deemed necessary to secure satisfactory foundation shall be as per the instructions of
the Engineer.
The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as directed by
Engineer considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labour /mechanical
equipment and other factors involved. The Contractor shall ensure every safety
measures for the workers. Neither any deduction nor any extra payment will be made
on this account.
2.2.1 Excavation over Area and in Trenches for Foundation and Drains
In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2.5 m
from the bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by
allowing steps of 500 mm on either side after every 2.5 m from the bottom.
Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to give a slope of 1:4 (1
horizontal: 4 vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps
shall be suitably increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the
Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take complete
CS-02 0-54
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S E AR T H W O R K I N S O I L
instructions in writing from the Engineer regarding the stepping, sloping or shoring
to be done for excavation deeper than 2.5 m.
2.2.2 Excavation in Trenches for Pipes, Conduits, etc.

The width of trenches for pipes, conduits, etc. shall be as follows:
a. Up to depths of 1 m, the authorized width of trench for excavation shall be arrived at
by adding 25 cm to the external diameter of pipe (not socket/ collar) cable, conduit,
etc. Where a pipe is laid on concrete bed/ cushioning layer, the authorized width
shall be the external diameter of pipe (not socket/ collar) plus 25 cm or the width of
concrete bed/ cushioning layer, whichever is more.
b. For depths exceeding 1 m, an allowance of 5 cm per m of depth for each side of the
trench shall be added to the authorized width (i.e. the external diameter of pipe plus
25 cm) for excavation. This allowance shall apply to the entire depth of the trench. In
firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2 m from
the bottom. For depths greater than 2 m, the excavation profiles shall be widened by
allowing steps of 50 cm on either side after every 2 m from bottom.
c. Where more than one pipe, cable, conduit, etc. are laid, the diameter shall be
reckoned as the horizontal distance from outside to outside of the outermost pipes,
cable, conduit, etc.
d. Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of trench shall be suitably increased
or side-sloped or the soil shored up, as directed by the Engineer. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to take complete instructions in writing from the
Engineer regarding the increase in the width of trench and sloping or shoring to be
done for excavation in soft, loose or slushy soils.
2.3 Foundation Preparation

All operations for foundation preparation shall be carried out in the dry. All necessary
precautions shall be taken to avoid disturbing the foundation material.
In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation
shall be leveled longitudinally and transversely or stepped as shown on the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Before the foundation is laid, the final surface shall be
cleaned, slightly watered and rammed. If the excavation for foundation is done to a
depth greater than that shown in the Drawings or as required by the Engineer, the
excess depth shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost with the concrete
of the mix used for leveling/ bed concrete for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the
foundation bed shall be dug out and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as
directed by the Engineer.
Excavation for drains shall be taken to cut the side and bottom to the required
shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall then be properly dressed. If the
excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the Drawing or as required
by the Engineer, the excess depth shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
cost with stiff clay puddle at places where the drains are required to be pitched and
with ordinary earth, properly watered and rammed, where the drains are not required
to be pitched. In case the drain is required is to be pitched, the back filling with clay
puddle, if required, shall be done simultaneously as the pitching proceeds. Brick
pitched storm water drains should be avoided as far as possible in filled-up areas and
loose soils.
In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the Contractor, the
foundation bottom shall be brought to the required level by the Contractor at his own
cost by filling in with earth duly watered, consolidated and rammed.
C S- 02 0 - 5 5
In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the Drawings or as required
by the Engineer, additional filling, wherever required, shall be done by the Contractor
at his own cost.
After excavation is complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that the excavation
is ready for inspection. No excavation shall be covered with concrete until it has been
inspected and approved by the Engineer in writing.
2.4 Shoring
Where necessary, the Contractor shall design the shoring in accordance with IS 3764:
1992 to ensure proper excavation. Shoring shall be of sufficient strength to resist side
pressures and ensure safety from slips, prevent damage to works and property and
injury to persons. It shall be removed as directed after all the items for which it is
required are completed.
Shoring shall generally be done when the depth of trench in soft/loose soil exceeds 2 m.
In case of loose and slushy soils, the depths at which shoring is to be done shall be
determined by the Engineer according to the nature of soil.
Shoring shall be ‘close’ or ‘open’ depending on the nature of soil and the depth of
trench.
2.4.1 Close Shoring

Close shoring shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trench generally
with short, upright members (poling boards). These members shall be 250 x 38 mm in
section or as directed by the Engineer.
The boards shall generally be placed in position vertically in pairs, one board on either
side of the cutting. They shall be kept apart by horizontal walings of strong wood at a
maximum spacing of 1.2 m cross-strutted with struts, or as directed by Engineer. The
length and diameter of the strut shall depend upon the width of the trench.
Where the soil is very soft and loose, the boards shall be placed horizontally against the
sides of the excavation and supported by vertical walings strutted to similar timber
pieces on the opposite face of the trench. The lowest boards supporting the sides shall
be taken in the ground for a minimum depth of 75 mm. No portion of the vertical side of
the trench shall remain exposed.
Withdrawal of the timber members shall be done very carefully to prevent collapse of the
trench. It shall start at one end and proceed systematically to the other end. Concrete or
masonry shall not be damaged while removing the planks. No claim shall be entertained
for any timber that cannot be withdrawn and is lost or buried, unless required by the
Engineer to be left permanently in position.
2.4.2 Open Shoring

In case of open planking and strutting, the entire surface of the trench walls is not
required to be covered. Vertical boards, 250 mm wide and 38 mm thick, shall be spaced
sufficiently apart to leave unsupported strips of 50 cm average width. The detailed
arrangement, sizes and the distance between timbers shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. In all other respect, specifications for close planking and strutting shall
apply to open planking and strutting.
2.5 Protection
Where directed by the Engineer, excavations shall be securely barricaded and
provided with proper caution signs, conspicuously displayed during the day and
properly illuminated with red lights and/or written using fluorescent reflective paint, as
directed by the Engineer, during the night to avoid accident. Night watchmen shall
patrol the excavations to avoid accidents. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible
CS-02 0-56
for any injury to life and damage to property caused by his negligence or accidents due
to his operations.
The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation
does not damage adjoining structures or dislocate existing services. Existing water
supply pipes, sluice valve chambers, sewer pipes, manholes, drainage pipes and
chambers, power supply cables, communication cables, etc. met within the course of
excavation shall be properly supported and adequately protected, so that these
services remain functional. All existing structures, foundations, pipes and cables that are
to be incorporated into the final work shall be adequately protected or replaced by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall not store material or otherwise occupy any part of the site in a
manner likely to hinder the operations of such services. Any services damaged during
excavation shall be restored in reasonable time by the Contractor at his own cost.
Excavation shall not be carried out below the level of existing adjacent foundations. If it
is necessary for some reason to excavate below the adjacent foundations, these
foundations shall be underpinned and shored by the Contractor prior to proceeding with
the excavation. The Contractor shall get written permission from the Engineer for
shoring as required.
2.6 Disposal of Excavated Material

Materials excavated from the foundation trenches shall be placed 1.5 m away from the
outer edge of excavations. All excavated materials will remain the property of the
Employer. Any material obtained from the excavation, which in the opinion of the
Engineer, is useful shall be sorted out by the Contractor and stacked separately in
regular stacks within the specified lead as directed by the Engineer. Materials suitable
and useful for backfilling or other uses shall be stacked in convenient places but not in
such a way as to obstruct free traffic movement or encroach on the area required for
construction purposes. It shall be used to the extent required to completely backfill the
structure to original ground level or the elevation shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. Materials not useful in any way shall be disposed of as directed by the
Engineer. If serviceable excavated rubble is required by the Contractor for use in other
items, it shall be paid for at the rate fixed in the tender or, if not so provided, at the rate
at which both parties mutually agree. The site shall be left clean of all debris on
completion.
2.7 Antiquities
Any finds of archaeological interest, such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other
articles of value, shall be delivered to the Engineer, who, in turn, shall hand it over to
the Employer for further processing with the concerned government agency.
2.8 Dewatering
The Contractor shall bail out or pump out of all water which may accumulate in the
excavation during the progress of the work, either from seepage, rain or any other
source and diverting surface flow, if any, by bunts or other means. The bunts shall be
removed after their purpose is served.
Pumping water from any foundation enclosure or trenches shall generally be done in
such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any damage to the foundation trenches,
concrete or masonry or any adjacent structures. The excavation shall be kept free from
water (a) during inspection and measurement, (b) when concrete and/or masonry works
are in progress and till they come above the natural water level and (c) till the Engineer
considers that the mortar is sufficiently set.
C S- 02 0 - 5 7
2.9 Slips and Blows

If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, they shall be removed by the Contractor
without any extra cost so as to provide correct dimensions required for the foundation.
2.10 Backfilling
The excavation for open areas and trenches shall be backfilled as specified in Section
CS-030.
3.1 Measurement
The length and breadth of excavation shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the
nearest cm. The depth of cutting shall be measured, correct to 5 mm, by recording
levels before the start of the work and after its completion. For surface excavation, the
area of excavation shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in square
meters. For all other types of excavation, the cubical contents shall be worked out to the
nearest two places of decimal in cubic meters.
For excavations over area and in trenches for foundations and drains up to a depth of
2.5 m, an all-around excavation of 150 mm beyond the outer dimension of footing shall
be measured for payment to make allowances for centering and shuttering. For
excavation depths greater than 2.5 m, an all-around excavation of 500 mm shall be
measured for this purpose. Any additional excavation beyond this limit shall be at the
risk and cost of the Contractor and shall not be measured for payment.
In case the ground is fairly uniform and where the site is not required to be leveled, the
Engineer may permit the measurements of depth of cutting with steel tape, correct to the
nearest cm. If the nature of excavation requires, diagonal ridges, cross ridges or dead-
men, fixed at positions decided by the Engineer, shall be left by the Contractor to permit
accurate measurements being taken with steel tape on the completion of the work.
Deduction of such ridges and dead-men shall be made from the measurements unless
the same are required to be removed later on and the earth so removed is utilized in the
work. In the latter case, nothing extra will be paid for their removal as subsequent
operation.
Driving of sounding bars or jumping small drill holes to explore the nature of the
substratum up to a total length of 1 m distributed in two or three places in each
foundation, if necessary, shall be considered incidental work and shall neither be
measured nor paid for separately.
Removal of slips and blows in the foundation trenches shall neither be measured nor
paid for.
Roads, embankments, etc. required for performing the excavation shall neither be
measured nor paid for.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to carry the foundation below the levels
shown on the Drawings, the excavation for the first 1.5 m of additional depth shall be
included in the quantity for the particular classification at the unit rate quoted in item E1
of the Bill of Quantities. Excavation below this additional depth of 1.5 m shall be paid for
as extra work at a rate to be decided under the General Conditions of Contract, unless
the Contractor is willing to accept payment at the unit rates quoted in the Bill of
Quantities. For all depths less than the design depth plus 1.5 m, the excavation shall be
paid for at tendered rates.
3.2 Payment
Payment for excavation over area or in trenches for foundations, drains, cables, etc.
shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of Quantities. These rates shall include
the following:
CS-02 0-58
a. Setting out works and making profiles, etc. according to the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer, and setting up benchmarks and other reference marks.
b. Excavation and removal of all materials of whatever nature, dry or wet, and
necessary for the construction of foundation, removal of blows and slips and use of
tools, plant and equipment necessary for satisfactory completion of the items and
preparing the bed for foundation.
c. Providing and subsequently removing shoring and strutting for cutting slopes.
d. Bailing and pumping out water, except when separately provided for in the Contract.
e. Forming (or leaving) dead-men and their removal after measurements.
f. Sorting of useful excavated material, conveying them up to the specified lead clear
beyond the structure stacking them neatly for backfilling or reuse and wasting
useless materials as directed by the Engineer.
g. Handing of antiquities and useful material.
h. Necessary protection including labour, materials and equipment to ensure safety
and protection against risk or accident.
i. Supply of facilities for inspection and measurement at any time by the Engineer.
j. Compensation for injury to humans and damage to property, if any, caused by the
Contractor’s operation connected with this item.
k. Small drill holes to explore the nature of substratum, if necessary.
No deduction shall be made from the rate, if in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the
operations specified in items c to k above are not required to be carried out on any
account whatsoever.
The lead of 3 0 m mentioned in the Bill of Quantities is the average lead for disposal
of excavated earth. The actual lead for this purpose may be more or less than the 30
m, for which no cost adjustment shall be made in the rates.
C S- 02 0 - 5 9
SE C T I O N CS - 0 30
FILL PLACEMENT
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section of the Specification covers the selection, placing and compaction of earth,
sand and gravel fill.
1.2 Definitions
Various types of backfills covered under this section are defined below:
Structural backfill Backfill where some measure of foundation support is required.
Random backfill Backfill where structural support is not a requirement.

Fill placement shall be performed in conformity with the following codes of practice:
a. IS 2720 (Part 7): 1980 – Methods of Test for Soils, Part 7: Determination of Water
Content – Dry Density Relation using Light Compaction
b. IS 2720 (Part 8): 1983 – Methods of Test for Soils, Part 8: Determination of Water
Content – Dry Density Relation using Heavy Compaction
2. MATERIALS
The Contractor shall produce backfill materials, including any necessary processing, to
meet the requirements for each class of backfill as specified below.
2.1 Structural Backfill

Structural backfill shall consist of sound granular materials, including crushed stone
masonry and concrete, meeting the gradation requirements given below:
Material size (mm) Percent fine (by weight)
300 100
150 50-100
100 38-100
50 18-83
25 0-63
10 0-40
5 0-22
1 0-10
0.5 0-7
0.08 0-2
2.2 Random Backfill

Random backfill shall consist of mixtures of clay, silt, sand, gravel, cobbles and rock
fragments to a maximum size of 75 mm, as obtained from excavations for permanent
construction (normally from the same area), after top soil and vegetation has been
removed. Concrete, masonry and brickwork rubble that have been crushed to less than
CS-03 0-60
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S F I L L PL AC E MEN T
75 mm in size may be substituted for random backfill, subject to the Engineer’s

approval.
Material used for random filling shall be free from shrubs, vegetation, grass,
brushwood, stone shingles and boulders larger than 75 mm in any direction, organic
matters, foreign matters and deleterious materials. All clods and lumps of earth
exceeding 75 mm in any direction shall be broken or removed before the material is
used for filling.
2.3 Sand Fill

Sand used for filling shall be natural sand approved by the Engineer. It shall be clean
and free from injurious amounts of dust, clay, soft or flaky particles, shale, salts, organic
matter, loam, mica or other deleterious substances and shall be approved by the
Engineer. Its grading shall be within the limits of grading zone IV or V specified in
Section 3 ‘Mortars’.
2.4 Gravel Fill

Gravel used for filling shall consist of single-washed crushed or broken stones or
shingles of approved quality and size varying from 12 to 20 mm. It shall be hard, strong,
dense, durable and clean, free from roots, grass, shrubs, rank vegetation, brushwood,
tress, sapling and rubbish. The fill material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
use.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 General Construction Procedures

Where suitable excavated material to be used for fill placement, the backfill material
shall be brought from the place where it was temporarily deposited and used. If the
available suitable excavated materials are inadequate in quantity, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer of the fact and obtain materials suitable for the proposed filling from
locations and sources approved by the Engineer.
Backfill shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer. It shall not be placed on any portion of the
foundations or against or upon any structure until the concrete or masonry in these
portions and structures has fully set and/or the Engineer has approved such portions
and structures. The Contractor shall repair any damage to an approved foundation
surface, as directed by the Engineer, prior to placement of backfill.
Prior to fill placement, all timber shoring and formwork in the foundation trenches, pits,
floors, etc. or other structures against or upon which backfill is to be placed shall be
removed. All debris, brickbats and trash of any sort shall also be cleaned out from
these areas.
No brush, roots, stumps, sod or other organic or unsuitable materials shall be placed in
the backfill. The Contractor shall continuously maintain the backfill in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer until the final completion and acceptance of the Works.
Materials incorporated into the backfill and determined by the Engineer to be in violation
of the Specification requirements shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.
Surfaces receiving fill layers shall, if smooth, be scarified to obtain a good key between
the new fill layer and the subgrade. Where backfilling is to be placed on steep sloping
ground, the surface of the ground shall be benched in steps or trenches as directed by
the Engineer. Where the ground is wet or spongy, the Contractor shall remove all
unsuitable material and, if necessary, under-drain the Site as may be directed by the
Engineer before benching or trenching is carried out.
Fill shall not be deposited under water without the Engineer’s permission. This
permission will not normally be granted for cohesive soils or for fill of any kind where the
C S- 03 0 - 6 1
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S F I L L P L A C E ME N T
standing water, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be pumped out or diverted.
Permission may be granted to place rock fill by random dumping in areas where the
depth of water is greater than 500 mm, but the method and the quality of the fill material
shall be subject to approval, and, when the fill is 500 mm above the water surface, it
shall be compacted until there is no discernible settlement under the equipment used for
placing or compacting fill. Thereafter, normal backfilling and compaction shall be
resumed.
3.2 Placement and Compaction
3.2.1 Structural Backfill

Structural backfill shall be placed in specific areas, such as under foundations, shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. It shall be placed in uniform horizontal
layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness. The layers shall be spread, watered and
then compacted by suitable equipment, such as mechanical or hand-operated rammers
as specified or directed to achieve a relative density of at least 90% in accordance with
IS 2720, Part 7 or 8 or as directed by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to ensure that
no damage is caused to pipes, drains, masonry or concrete around or against which the
backfill is placed.
3.2.2 Random Backfill

Random backfill shall be placed in the spaces between foundation masonry or concrete
and the sides of excavation, in plinths, under floors, in trenches for cables, pipes, etc. It
shall be placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be
spread, watered, rammed and well compacted by means of mechanical or hand-
operated rammers to at least 90% of the compaction obtainable at optimum moisture
content (Proctor density). Flooding with water for compaction shall not be allowed.
Areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment, such as those adjacent to walls and
columns, shall be tamped by hand rammers or by hand held power rammers to the
required density. Where specified, every third and the topmost layer shall also be
compacted with power roller of minimum 8T wherever depth of filling exceeds 1.5 m,
vibratory power rollers shall be used to compact the filling, unless otherwise directed
by Engineer.
For filling under floors, the finished level of filling shall be kept to the slope intended to
be given to the floor. The top and sides of fillings shall be neatly dressed. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in
the random filling during execution and till the completion of Work.
3.2.3 Sand Fill

If sand is to be filled under floors, the filled-in sand shall be kept flooded with water for
24 hours to ensure maximum compaction. Any temporary work required to maintain the
sand under flooded condition shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost. The
surface of the sand fill shall then be well dressed and shall be approved by the Engineer
before any other work is taken over the fill.
3.2.4 Gravel Fill

Gravel filling shall be carried out as the base course in foundation trenches or as
specified in the Drawings. Gravel to be filled shall be uniformly blinded with the
approved type of soil and/or sand to obtain full compaction. It shall be filled in the
specified thickness, watered, rammed, compacted, consolidated and dressed, entirely to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
CS-03 0-62
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S F I L L PL AC E MEN T
3.2.5 Tests on Backfill

Test to establish proper compaction of the backfill shall be carried out by the Contractor.
In general, two tests per 50 square meters of filling shall be performed for this purpose.
The cost of tests carried out will be borne by the Contractors.
4.1 Measurement
For fills placed on sides of foundations, measurement of fills shall be made of the
volume, in cubic meters, bounded by the existing ground, excavated surface or surface
of structures and lines and grades of the fill as shown on the Drawings or as required by
the Engineer. For filling in plinths, under floors or as foundation base course, the depth
of filling shall be the compacted depth of filling. The dimensions of filling in this case
shall be the dimension measured prior to fill placement
Dimensions shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest 10 mm, and
individual quantities shall be calculated correct to two places of decimals of a cubic
meter.
4.2 Payment
Payment for structural and random backfills shall be made at the unit prices tendered in
the Bill of Quantities. These unit rates shall include costs of excavating, loading, hauling,
dumping, spreading and compacting fills.
C S- 03 0 - 6 3
CEMENT CONCRETE WORKS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section of the Specification covers construction of cast-in-place concrete, including
furnishing all materials, labour, skill and equipment and performing all operations for
manufacturing, testing, transporting, forming, placing, finishing and curing concrete
required for completion of the Works.
All structures shall be built in a workmanlike manner and to the lines, grades, and
dimensions shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the Engineer. All metal or other
accessories necessary for concrete work completion shall be installed, and all openings
and concrete blackouts shall be formed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
The dimensions of each structure shown on the Drawings shall be subject to such
changes as may be found necessary by the Engineer to adapt the structures to the
conditions disclosed by the excavation. The locations of typical construction joints shall
be shown on the Drawings, but the Drawings may not show all construction joints that
may be required. The location of all construction joints shall be subject to the approval
by the Engineer. Concrete shall be placed in lifts as shown on the Drawings or as
approved by the Engineer.
1.2 Definitions
Various terms included in this section are defined below:
Ordinary concrete Concrete produced by adopting nominal concrete mix
Controlled concrete Concrete produced by designing the concrete mix
Fine aggregate Aggregate most of which passes through 4.75 mm IS sieve
and contains only as much fine material as is permitted in IS
383 for various sizes and grading
Coarse aggregate Aggregate most of which is retained on 4.75 mm I.S. sieve

The works specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards,
or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein:
a. IS 456: 2000 – Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete
b. IS 10262: 1982 – Recommended Practice for Concrete Mix Design
c. IS 383: 1970 – Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregate from Natural Sources
for Concrete
d. IS 3025 (Part 22): 1986 – Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical)
for Water and Waste Water, Part 22: Acidity
e. IS 3025 (Part 23): 1986 – Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical)
for Water and Waste Water, Part 22: Alkalinity
f. IS 516: 1959 – Method of Test for Strength of Concrete
g. IS 1199: 1959 – Method of Sampling and Analysis of Concrete
h. IS 1200 (Part II): 1992 – Method of Measurement of Building and Civil Engineering
Work (Concrete Work)
CS-04 0-64
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S C E ME N T C O N C R E T E W O R K S
i. IS 1322: 1993 – Specification for Bitumen Felt for Water Proofing and Damp
Proofing
j. IS 1791: 1985 – General Requirements for Batch-type Concrete Mixers
k. IS 2386 (Part I): 1963 – Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete: Particle Size
and Shape
l. IS 2386 (Part II): 1963 – Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete: Estimation of
Deleterious Materials and Organic Impurities
m. IS 2386 (Part III): 1963 – Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete: Specific
Gravity, Density, Voids Absorption and Bulking
n. IS 2386 (Part IV): 1963 – Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete: Mechanical
Properties
o. IS 2386 (Part V): 1963 – Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete: Soundness
p. IS 2505: 1992 – General Requirements for Concrete Vibrators - Immersion Type
q. IS 2506: 1985 – General Requirements for Concrete Vibrators - Screed Board
Concrete Vibrators
r. IS 2645: 2003 – Specification for Integral Waterproofing Compounds For Cement
Mortar and Concrete
s. IS 3068: 1986 – Specification for Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate for
Use in Concrete.
t. IS 3812: 2003 – Specification for Fly Ash For Use as Pozzolana and Admixture in
Cement Mortar and Concrete
u. IS 4656 – Specification for Form Vibrators for Concrete
v. IS 7861 (Part I): 1981 – Code of Practice for Extreme Weather Concreting,
Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting
w. IS 7861 (Part II): 1981 – Code of Practice for Extreme Weather Concreting,
Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting
x. IS 9103: 1999 – Specification for Concrete Admixtures
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Source of Materials

Within 30 days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
in writing, naming the cement manufacturer from which the cement is to be supplied, the
source or sources of all aggregates and the manufacturer and brand name of each
admixture proposed of use. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials
and mixes shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
1.4.2 Mix Designs for Controlled Concrete

a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a separate mix design for each different
combination of ingredients anticipated to cover the requirements of the mix for
controlled concrete.
b. Not less than 15 days prior to placement of any concrete, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for approval the proposed mix design for the controlled concrete to
be placed, together with the results of laboratory test verifying that the mix design
results in the required concrete properties.
c. Not less than 15 days prior to placement of any concrete, the Contractor shall submit
representative samples of all aggregates to be used in the controlled concrete.
C S- 04 0 - 6 5
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S C EMEN T CONC R ET E WOR K S
1.4.3 Procedures
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering concrete batching,
mixing, transporting, forming, placing, curing and protecting the concrete.
1.4.4 Placement Drawings

a. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for review the concrete placement (lift)
drawings showing the sequence and schedule of individual placements. A concrete
placement is defined as a portion of concrete work placed in one continuous
operation between given lines and construction, contraction or expansion joints.
b. The placement drawings shall be submitted at least 15 days before the scheduled
time of the first placement represented by the drawings. The drawings shall show
the locations, dimensions, concrete block-outs, openings and details of all
embedded items other than reinforcing steel, including blackouts provided for
installations by others.
1.4.5 Locations of Construction Joints

a. The locations of all construction joints shall be shown on the placement drawings.
They may be subject to revisions as found necessary by the Engineer to adapt the
structures to the conditions disclosed during construction.
b. All concrete shall be placed in lifts as approved by the Engineer. Lift heights
generally shall not exceed 2.2 m.
1.4.6 Test Results / Catalogues

a. Results of tests specified herein to be performed by the Contractor shall be
submitted promptly upon completion of the tests.
b. Test reports for each lot of cement from which any cement is used in the Work shall
be submitted. Each shipment of cement shall be referenced to the lot from which the
shipment is made.
c. For all admixtures and curing compounds used, manufacturer’s catalogues and
certificate of compliance with the contract requirements shall be submitted.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Water
Water for construction work shall not be salty or blackish and shall be clean drinking
water, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and traces of oils,
acid and injurious alkali, salts, sugar, organic matter, vegetation growth and other
material that may be deleterious to bricks, stone, concrete or steel. Water shall be
obtained from the sources approved by the Engineer. Sources of water shall be
maintained at such a depth and water shall be withdrawn in such a manner as to
exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials. Containers for transport, storage and
handling of water shall be clean.
The pH value of water shall not be less than 6. The following concentrations represent
the maximum permissible values of deleterious materials in water:
a. Limit on Acidity: Neutralization of 100 ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as
an indicator, shall not require more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH, tested as per IS
3025 (Part 22): 1986.
b. Limit on Alkalinity: Neutralization of 100 ml sample of water, using mixed indicator,
shall not require more than 25 ml of 0.02 normal H2SO4, tested as per IS 3025 (Part
23): 1986.
CS-04 0-66
c. Percentage of solids: Maximum permissible limits of solids when tested in

accordance with IS 3025: 1986 shall be:
Organic: 200 mg/liter
Inorganic: 3000 mg/liter
Sulphates: 400 mg/liter
Chlorides: 2000 mg/liter for concrete not containing embedded steel
500 mg/liter for reinforced concrete work
Suspended matter: 2000 mg/liter
Water found satisfactory for mixing shall be considered suitable for curing. However,
water used for curing shall not produce any objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on
the surface.
Water from each source shall be tested before the commencement of Works and
thereafter once in every three months till the completion of the Works. In case of
groundwater, testing shall also be done for different points of drawdown. Water from
each source shall be tested during the dry season before monsoon and again after
monsoon.
2.2 Cement
2.2.1 Types
The cement used in concrete shall be any of the following grades:
a. 43 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112: 1989
b. 53 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 12269:1987
c. Rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041: 1990
d. Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455: 1989
e. Portland Pozzolana cement (flyash based) conforming to IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991
f. Portland Pozzolona cement (calcined clay based) conforming to IS 1489 (Part 2):
1991
g. Hydrophobic cement conforming to IS 8043: 1991
h. Low heat Portland cement conforming to IS 12600: 1989
i. Sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330: 1988
j. White cement conforming to IS 8042: 1989
The type of cement selected should be appropriate for the intended use as per
instruction of the Engineer. Different types of cement shall not be mixed together. In
case more than one type of cement is used in any work, a record shall be kept showing
the location and the types of cement used.
Higher grade cement, specially grade 53, shall be used only where such use is
warranted for making higher strength concrete and also where good quality assurance
measures are in place, by which proper precaution are taken to relieve the higher heat
of hydration through chilling of aggregates or by proper curing of concrete.
High alumina, low heat Portland, super sulphate, rapid hardening and blended cements
shall be used only with the prior approval of the Engineer. Necessary precautions with
regard to their setting and hardening times, time required for de-shuttering, curing, etc.,
shall also be taken after carefully complying with specific literature for these cement
types. Other combinations of Portland cement with mineral admixtures of quality
conforming to relevant Indian Standards may also be used in the manufacture of
C S- 04 0 - 6 7
concrete, provided that there are satisfactory data on their suitability, such as
performance tests on concrete containing them, and only in such case wherein
specifically called for in the contract.
Where the cement type is not specified, ordinary Portland cement shall be used. The
measurement of proportion of cement should normally be on the basis of weight and
whole bags each undisturbed and sealed 50 kg. When part bag is required, cement
shall be taken to see that each bag contain full quantity of cement.
The Contractor should ensure that the cement is of sound and of required quality before
using it. Cement required for use shall be as fresh as possible. Any cement that has
deteriorated, cracked or has been damaged shall not be used. Cement with doubtful
quality shall not be used pending testing and satisfactory results. Cement that is
condemned shall be immediately removed from the work site.
2.2.2 Compressive Strength

Compressive strength requirement of each type of cement for various grades when
tested in accordance with IS 4031 (part 6) shall be as under:
Sample age at Strength in N/mm2 not less than for
testing (hours) Grade 33 Grade 43 Grade 53
72 + 1 16 23 27
168 + 2 22 33 37
672 + 4 33 43 53
2.2.3 Setting Time

Setting time of cement of any type of any grade when tested by Vicat’s apparatus
method described in IS 4031 shall conform to the following requirement:
a. Initial setting time: Not less than 30 minutes
b. Final setting time: Not more than 600 minutes
2.2.4 Supply
The cement shall be packed in jute sacking bags conforming to IS 2580 or double
hessian bituminized (CRI type) or woven HDPE conforming to IS 11652. Woven
polypropylene conforming to IS 11653, jute synthetic union conforming to IS 12174 or
any other approved composite bags may be used. The bags shall bear the
manufacturer’s name and/or his registered trademark, the grade, batch number and
type of cement and the date of manufacturing of batch of cement with NS mark printed.
Every delivery of cement shall be accompanied by a manufacturer’s certificate
confirming that the supplied cement conforms to relevant specifications. These
certificates shall be endorsed to the Engineer for his record.
Every consignment of cement must have identification marks on packages indicating the
date of manufacturing, grade and type of cement, batch number, etc. Cement brought to
works shall not be more than 6 weeks old from the date of manufacture.
Effective precautionary measures shall be taken to eliminate dust nuisance during
loading or transferring cement.
2.2.5 Stacking and Storage

Cement in bags shall be stored and stacked in a shed that is dry, leak proof and as
moisture-proof as possible. Flooring of the shed shall consist of two layers of dry bricks
laid on well-consolidated earth to avoid contact of cement bags with the floor. Stacking
shall be done about 150 to 200 mm clear above the ground/floor using wooden planks.
Cement bags shall be stacked at least 450 mm clear off the walls and in rows of two
bags, leaving a space of at least 600 mm between two consecutive rows. In each row,
CS-04 0-68
the cement bags shall be kept close together so as to reduce air circulation. Stacking
shall not be more than 10 bags high to avoid lumping under pressure. In stacks more
than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion i.e.
alternately lengthwise and crosswise, so as to tie the stacks together and minimize the
danger of toppling over.
Different kinds or brands of cement or cement of the same brand from different factory
(mills) shall be stacked and stored in separate groups and shall not be mixed during use
except when directed in writing by the Engineer. Cement shall be kept in a store under
double locking arrangement so that it can be taken out or fresh stock admitted with the
knowledge of supervising staff of the Works.
Cement bags shall be stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in the
order in which they are received. A board indicating stock and daily transactions of
cement shall be kept in each room of the cement store. The cement shall not be stored
unduly long periods. It shall not be handled in such a way as to impair its strength or
useful characteristics.
When temporarily stored in the open for use within 48 hours, cement shall be kept on a
platform of planks about 150 to 200 mm above the ground and covered with a tarpaulin.
For extra safety during monsoon, or when cement is expected to be stored for an
unusually long period, each stack shall be completely enclosed by a water proofing
membrane, such as polyethylene, which shall cover the top of the stack. Care shall be
taken to see that the water proofing membrane is not damaged at any time during use.
Storage of cement at the work site shall be at the Contractor’s expense and risk. Any
damage occurring to cement due to faulty storage in the Contractor’s shed or on
account of negligence on his part shall be the liability of the Contractor.
Ordinary cement stored for more than two months from the date of receipt from the
factory shall be subjected to test and used only if found satisfactory. The cost of test
shall be borne by the contractor responsible for the storage after two months from
receipt.
2.3 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate for use in concrete shall be natural sand or crushed sand conforming to
IS 383. The sand shall consist of silicious material having hard, strong, durable,
chemically inert particles, free from adherent coatings, organic impurities such as
decayed vegetation humps, coal, dust, etc. It shall not contain appreciable amount of
clay balls or pellets and harmful impurities, such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica,
shale or similar laminated materials, in such form or in such quantities as to cause
corrosion of metal or adversely affect the hardening, strength and durability of concrete.
Machine made sand may be acceptable, provided the constituent rock composition is
sound, hard, dense, non-organic, uncoated and durable against weathering. Machine
made sand shall be accepted provided its grading and finer particle limits conform to IS
383 (1970).
All fine aggregates proposed for use in the Works shall be subject to the Engineer’s
approval. After specific materials have been accepted, the source of supply of such
materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
2.3.1 Sampling and Testing

Sampling of fine aggregates for mix design and determination of its suitability shall be
done under the supervision of the Engineer and delivered to the laboratory, well in
advance of the schedule for placing of concrete. Records of tests that have been made
on the proposed aggregate and on concrete made from this source of aggregate shall
be furnished to the Engineer in advance of the work for determining the suitability of the
proposed aggregate.
C S- 04 0 - 6 9
2.3.2 Silt Content

The maximum quantity of silt in sand shall not exceed 3% by weight. Fine aggregate
containing more than this amount of silt shall be washed as many times as directed by
the Engineer so as to bring the silt content within the allowable limits. Nothing extra shall
be paid for washing.
2.3.3 Foreign Material Limitations

The percentages of deleterious substances in sand, delivered to the mixer shall not
exceed the following: (Refer Code IS 383 1970)
SN Substances Percent by weight
Uncrushed Crushed
1 Material finer than 75 micron I.S. sieve 3.00 15.00
2 Shale 1.00 -
3 Coal and lignite 1.00 1.00
4 Clay lumps 1.00 1.00
5 Total of all above substances including items 1 5.00 2.00
to 5 for uncrushed sand and items 3 and 4 for
crushed sand.
2.3.4 Gradation
Unless otherwise directed or approved, the grading of sand shall lie within the limits
indicated hereunder: (Refer Code IS 383 1970)
IS Sieve Percentage passing for
Grading Grading Zone Grading Zone Grading Zone
Zone I II III IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 microns 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 microns 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 microns 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15
Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves, other
than the 600 microns IS sieve, by not more than 5%, it shall be regarded as falling within
that grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied to percentage passing the 600
micron IS sieve or to percentage passing any other sieve size on the coarser limit of
grading zone I or the finer limit of grading zone IV. Fine aggregates conforming to
Grading Zone IV shall not be used for reinforced cement concrete works unless mix
designs and preliminary tests have shown its suitability for producing concrete of the
specified strength and workability.
2.3.5 Fineness Modulus

The sand shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.2 or more than 3.2. The
fineness modulus shall be determined by adding the cumulative percentages retained
on the I.S. sieve sizes (4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and 150
micron) and dividing the sum by 100.
2.3.6 Storage of Aggregates

Fine aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard, dry and level patch of ground. If such
a surface is not available, a platform of planks or old corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of
CS-04 0-70
bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to prevent contamination with
clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter.
Stacks of fine aggregates shall be kept in stockpiles sufficiently removed from those of
coarse aggregates to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from getting
intermixed. If required, divide walls shall be provided to separate the aggregates. Fine
aggregates shall be stacked in a place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum.
Unless specified otherwise or necessitated by site conditions, stacking of the fine
aggregates should be carried out in regular stacks. The suggested sizes for fine
aggregate stacks are as follows:
SN Length (m) Breadth (m) Height (m)
1 2.0 2.0 0.50
2 5.0 5.0 1.00
3 5.0 1.0 0.50
2.3.7 Screening and Washing

Sand shall be prepared for use by such screening or washing or both, as necessary, to
remove all objectionable foreign matter while separating the sand grains to the required
size fractions.
2.3.8 Measurements
As the fine aggregate bulks to a substantial extent when partially wet, measurements
shall be taken when the stacks are dry or appropriate allowance made for bulking. In
case the fine aggregate is damp at the time of proportioning the ingredients for concrete,
its quantity shall be increased suitably to allow for bulkage. The relation between
moisture content and percentage of bulking is given below for guidance only.
Moisture content (%) Bulking % (by volume)
2 15
3 20
4 25
5 30
2.4 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be specified as stone aggregate or gravel obtained from
approved/ authorized sources.
Stone aggregate shall consist of naturally occurring (crushed or broken) stones. It shall
be hard, strong, dense, durable and clean. It shall be free from veins, adherent coating,
and injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces, alkali, vegetable matter and other
deleterious substances. The aggregate shall be roughly triangular in shape. Flaky and
elongated pieces shall be avoided. It shall conform to IS 383 (1970) unless otherwise
specified. Unless special stones from particular quarries are mentioned, the aggregates
shall be broken from the best granite/ quartzite/ gneiss stones, in that order, available in
the region and approved by the Engineer. These stones shall have no deleterious
reaction with cement.
Gravel shall consist of naturally occurring (uncrushed, crushed or broken) riverbed
shingle or pit gravel. It shall be sound, hard and clean. It shall be free from flat particles
of shale or similar laminated material, powdered clay, silt, loam, adherent coating, alkali,
vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. Pit gravel shall be washed if it
contains soil materials adhering to it. These shall conform to IS 383 (1970), unless
otherwise specified.
The coarse aggregate shall be of the following sizes:
C S- 04 0 - 7 1
a. Normal cement concrete of 100 mm and above thickness: graded 20 mm and below.
b. Cement concrete topping thickness 40 mm and above: graded from 12 mm and
below.
c. Mass cement concrete of 500 mm and above: graded 38 mm and below.
2.4.1 Deleterious Materials

Coarse aggregate shall not contain any deleterious material, such as pyrites, coal,
lignite, mica, shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali, soft fragments, seashells
and organic impurities in such quantity as to affect the strength or durability of the
concrete. Coarse aggregate to be used for reinforced cement concrete shall not contain
any material liable to attack the steel reinforcement. Aggregates that are chemically
reactive with alkalis of cement shall not be used. The maximum quantity of deleterious
material shall not be more than 5% of the weight of coarse aggregate when determined
in accordance with IS 386.
2.4.2 Size and Grading

Stone aggregate and gravel shall be either graded or single sized, as specified. Nominal
size and grading shall be as follows:
a. Nominal sizes of graded stone aggregate or gravel shall be 40, 20, 16, or 12.5 mm,
as specified. For any one of the nominal sizes, the proportion of other sizes shall be
listed below:
IS Sieve Percentage passing (by weight) for nominal size of
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
80 mm 100 - - -
63 mm - - - -
40 mm 95 to 100 100 - -
20 mm 30 to 70 95 to 100 100 100
16 mm - - 90 to 100 -
12.5 mm - - - 90 to 100
10 mm 10 to 35 25 to 55 30 to 70 40 to 85
4.75 mm 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
b. Nominal sizes of single-sized stone aggregate or gravel shall be 63, 40, 20, 16, 12.5
or 10 mm, as specified. For any one of the nominal size, the proportion of other
sizes shall be as listed below:
IS Sieve Percentage passing (by weight) for nominal size of
63 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm
80 mm 100 - - - - -
63 mm 85-100 100 - - - -
40 mm 0-30 85-100 100 - - -
20 mm 0- 5 0-20 85-100 100 - -
16 mm - - - 85-100 100 -
12.5 mm - - - - 85-100 100
10 mm 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85-100
4.75 mm - - 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-20
2.36 mm - - - - - 0-5
c. When stone aggregate or gravel brought to site is single sized (ungraded), it shall be
mixed with single-sized aggregate of different sizes in the proportion to be
determined by field tests to obtain graded aggregate of specified nominal size. For
CS-04 0-72
the required nominal size, the proportion of other sizes in mixed aggregate shall be
in accordance with those specified under a above. The recommended proportions
by volume for mixing of different sizes of single size (ungraded) aggregate to obtain
the required nominal size of graded aggregate shall be as follows:
Cement Nominal size of Parts of single size aggregate of size
concrete graded aggregate 50 mm 40 mm 20 mm 12.5 10 mm
required mm
1:6:12 63 9 - 3 - -
1:6:12 40 - 9 3 - -
1:5:10 63 7.5 - 2.5 - -
1:5:10 40 - 7.5 2.5 - -
1:4:8 63 6 - 2 - -
1:4:8 40 - 6 2 - -
1:3:6 63 4.5 - 1.5 - -
1:3:6 40 - 4.5 1.5 - -
1:3:6 20 - - 4.5 - 1.5
1:2:4 40 - 2.5 1 - 1.5
1:2:4 20 - - 3 - 1
1:2:4 12.5 - - - 3 1
1:1.5:3 20 0 0 2 - 1
The proportions indicated above are by volume. If necessary, these proportions may
be varied marginally by the Engineer after sieve analysis of aggregate brought to
site for obtaining the required graded aggregate. No adjustments in the rate shall
be made for any variation in the proportions so ordered by the Engineer. If single-
size coarse aggregates are not premixed at site to obtain the graded coarse
aggregate required for the mix, the volume of single size aggregates required for
the mix shall be suitably increased to account for reduction in the total volume at
the site of mixing.
Grading tests shall be taken in the beginning and at change of source or material.
Where required by the Engineer, tests indicated in IS 383 and IS 456 shall be carried
out in an approved laboratory at the Contractor’s cost to show the acceptability of the
material.
Coarse aggregates of a porous nature, where absorption of water after 24 hours
immersion in water, is more than 5% by weight shall not be used.
Sample of coarse aggregates required for the work shall be approved by the Engineer
both for quality and grading and shall be kept in the site office. The coarse aggregates
to be used shall conform to these samples.
For controlled concrete, the aggregate shall be supplied in separate batches, consisting
at least of coarse, medium and fine grading. These shall be combined in proportions
given by standard grading curves specified in relevant IS codes.
2.4.3 Stacking
Coarse aggregate shall be stacked on a hard, dry and level patch of ground. When
stack piling, the aggregate shall not form pyramids resulting in segregation of different
sized materials. It shall be stacked separately according to nominal size of coarse
aggregates and handled in such a manner as to prevent intermixing of different sizes of
aggregate required separately for grading purposes. No foreign matters shall be allowed
to be mixed with the aggregates. If covered with dust, etc., the aggregates shall be
washed clean before use.
C S- 04 0 - 7 3
Unless specified otherwise or necessitated by site conditions, stacking of coarse

aggregates should be carried out in regular stacks. The suggested sizes for the
aggregate stacks are as follows:
SN Length (m) Breadth (m) Height (m)
1 2.0 2.0 0.5
2 5.0 5.0 1.0
3 5.0 1.0 0.5
2.4.4 Testing
Coarse aggregate shall be tested for the followings (as per IS 2386).
a. Determination of particle size and shape.
b. Estimation of organic impurities (as per IS 2386 Part II).
c. Surface moisture.
d. Determination of 10% fine value.
2.4.5 Measurements
The aggregates shall be measured in stacks and paid for after making a deduction of
7.5% of the gross measurements of stacks in respect of aggregates of nominal size
40 mm and above. No deduction from the gross measurements of the stacks is to be
made in respect of aggregate of nominal size below 40 mm.
2.5 Admixtures
Admixtures for promoting workability, improving strength, accelerating or retarding
setting, entraining air or for any other purpose may be used in concrete as specified or
only with the prior approval of the Engineer. The admixtures shall conform to IS 9103.
No admixtures shall be accepted for use in concrete unless these are tested in
accordance with IS 9103 and the test results are approved by the Engineer.
The proprietary name and the net quantity of content shall be clearly indicated in each
package or container of admixtures. The admixtures shall be uniform within each batch
and uniform between all batches.
The dosage of admixtures may vary according to manufacturer’s specifications. These
specifications shall be carefully followed so as to ensure complete solution of the
product or to prepare a standard solution of uniform strength for easy use.
If two or more admixtures from the same manufacturers are used simultaneously, the
manufacturer shall certify their compatibility. Admixtures produced by different
manufacturers shall be tested to establish their compatibility before their use in
concrete. All such test reports shall be furnished to the Engineer for his approval before
their use in concrete.
Some admixture may be in the form of powder, particle or high concentration liquids that
may require mixing with water prior to dosing. Under these conditions, water in solution
shall be considered as part of the total water content in the batch in order to maintain
the water-cement ratio.
Certain admixtures may contain significant amounts of finely divided insoluble materials
or active ingredients that may or may not be readily soluble. It is essential for such
admixtures that precautions be taken to ensure that these constituents be kept in a state
of uniform suspension before actual batching. When relatively small amounts of
powered admixtures are to be used directly, these shall be pre-blended with cement.
CS-04 0-74
3. GRADES OF CONCRETE
The grades of concrete to be used in the Works shall be indicated in the Drawings or in
the Bill of Quantities by M (mix) and a number denoting the required characteristic
compressive strength of 150 mm cube at 28 days, expressed in N/mm2. The
characteristic strength of concrete shall be defined as the strength of material below
which not more that 5% of the test results are expected to fall.
Generally, the following grades of concrete shall be used for the works:
Group Grade designation Specified characteristic
compressive strength
(N/mm2)
Ordinary M10 10
concrete M15 15
M20 20
Standard M25 25
concrete M30 30
M35 35
M40 40
M45 45
M50 50
M55 55
M60 60
High M65 65
strength M70 70
concrete M75 75
M80 80
Grades M10 and M15 concrete may be used for lean concrete, foundations of masonry
walls or temporary construction. Grades lower than M20 shall not be used in reinforced
concrete. The minimum grade of concrete for plain and reinforced concrete shall be as
follows:
Exposure Plain Concrete Reinforced Concrete
Minimum Maximu Minimum Minimum Maximu Minimum
cement m free grade of cement m free grade of
content water concrete content water concrete
(kg/m3) cement (kg/m3) cement
ratio ratio
Mild 220 0.60 - 300 0.55 M20
Moderate 240 0.60 M15 300 0.50 M25
Severe 250 0.50 M20 320 0.45 M30
Very severe 260 0.45 M20 340 0.45 M35
Extreme 280 0.40 M25 360 0.40 M40
The cement content prescribed in the above table is irrespective of the grade of
cement. Additions such as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be
taken into account in the concrete composition with respect to the cement content and
water-cement ratio, if the suitability is established and as long as the maximum
amounts taken into account do not exceed the limit of pozzolana and slag specified in
IS 1489 (Part 1) and IS 455, respectively.
C S- 04 0 - 7 5
The above minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios apply to 20
mm nominal maximum size aggregate only. For other sizes of aggregates, these
should be changed as per Table 6 of IS 456.
4. WORKABILITY
The concrete mix proportion shall be such that the concrete has adequate workability for
its placing conditions and can properly be compacted with the means available.
Suggested ranges of workability of concrete measured in accordance with IS 1199 are
given below:
Placing conditions Workability Slump (mm)
Blinding concrete: shallow Very low Determine compacting factor (see IS
sections: Pavements using 1199), suggested value of
pavers compacting factor 0.75 to 0.80
Mass concrete: Lightly Low 25-75
reinforced sections in slabs,
beams, wall, columns, floors
Hand placed pavements: Medium 50-100
canal lining; Strip footing
Heavily reinforced sections in
slabs, beams, walls, columns:
Slip form work: Pumped Medium 75-100
concrete
Trench fill High 100-150
Tremie concrete Very High Determine flow (see IS 9103)
For most placing conditions, internal vibrators (needle vibrators) are suitable. The
diameter of the needle shall be determined based on the density and spacing of
reinforcement bars and thickness of sections. For tremie concrete, vibrators shall not be
used.
5. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
The concrete mix proportions shall be selected to ensure that the workability of the fresh
concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing, so that after compaction,
it surrounds all reinforcements and completely fills the formwork. When concrete is
hardened, it shall have the required strength, durability and surface finish.
The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made as follows:
a. By adopting nominal concrete mix; such concrete shall be called “Ordinary
Concrete”.
b. By designing the concrete mix; such concrete shall be called “Controlled Concrete”.
5.1 Ordinary Concrete

Ordinary concrete shall be used only when accurate control is impracticable and not
necessary. However, if ordinary concrete is allowed by the Engineer, it shall be used
only in concrete of grades of M20 or lower.
Ordinary concrete does not require preparation of trial mixes. Concrete mix proportions
for such concrete shall be as follows:
CS-04 0-76
Grade Maximum total quantity of dry Proportion of fine Maximum quantity

aggregates by mass per 50 kg aggregate to of water per 50 kg
of cement (kg)1 coarse aggregate of cement (lit)
(by mass)
M5 800 Generally 1:2, but 60
M7.5 625 subject to an upper 45
M10 480 limit of 1:1.5 and a 34
lower limit of 1:2.5
M15 330 32
M20 250 30
The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates shall be adjusted from the upper limit
to the lower limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and
the maximum size of coarse aggregates becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate
shall be used.
The cement content of the mix specified in the above table for any nominal mix shall be
proportionately increased if the quantity of water in the mix has to be increased to
overcome the difficulties of placement and compaction, so that the water content ratio
specified in not exceeded. In the case of vibrated concrete, the limit specified may be
suitably reduced to avoid segregation.
The quantity of water used in the concrete for the mix for reinforced concrete work shall
be sufficient, but not more than sufficient, to produce a dense concrete of adequate
workability for its purpose, which will surround and properly grip al the reinforcement.
Workability of the concrete shall be controlled by maintaining a water content that is
found to give a concrete that is sufficiently wet to be placed and compacted without
difficulty with the means available.
The quantity of water required from durability point of view may be less than the value
given above.
If ordinary concrete made in accordance with the proportions given for a particular grade
does not yield the specified strength, such concrete shall be classified as belonging to
the appropriate lower grade. Ordinary concrete proportioned for a given grade in
accordance with the above table shall not, however, be placed in a higher grade on the
ground that the test strengths are higher than the minimum specified.
5.2 Controlled Concrete
5.2.1 Mix Design

Mix design for controlled concrete shall determine the proportions of cement, aggregate
and water to achieve the target mean strength for the specified grade of concrete. The
proportions of the mix shall be determined by weight. Mix proportioning shall be carried
out as per IS 10262: 2009 or other standard method(s) approved by the Engineer. The
cost of design mix shall be borne by the contractor.
Mix proportions shall be designed to ensure that the workability of fresh concrete is
suitable for conditions of handling and placing so that it surrounds all reinforcement and
completely fills the formwork after compaction. When concrete is hardened, it shall have
the stipulated strength, durability and impermeability.
All concrete proportions for various grades of concrete shall be designed separately and
the mix proportions established keeping in view the workability for various structural
elements, methods of placing and compacting.
1
To be taken as the sum of the individual masses of fine and coarse aggregates
C S- 04 0 - 7 7
The mix shall be designed to produce the grade of concrete having the required
workability and characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in the table
above.
5.2.2 Approval of Design Mix

The calculated mix proportions shall be checked by means of trial batches as per IS
10262. The Contractor shall submit details of each trial mix of each grade of concrete
designed for various workability conditions to the Engineer for his comments and
approval. Concrete of any particular design mix and grade shall be produced/
manufactured for works only on obtaining written approval of the Engineer.
For any change in quality/ quantity in the ingredients of a particular concrete, for which
mix has been designed earlier and approved by the Engineer, the mix has to be
redesigned and approval obtained again. Cost of such mix design shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Whenever there is a change either in the required strength of concrete or water cement
ratio or workability or the source of aggregates and/or cement, fresh trial mix shall be
carried out to determine the revised proportion of the mix to suit the altered conditions.
5.2.3 Standard Deviation

Standard deviation calculations of test results based on tests conducted on the same
mix design for a particular grade designation shall be done in accordance with IS 456.
Standard Deviation Based on Test Results
The total number of test results required to constitute an acceptable record for
calculation of standard deviation shall be not less than 30. Attempts shall be made to
obtain the 30 test results, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first time.
The calculation of the standard deviation shall be brought up to date after every change
of mix design and at least once a month.
Determination of Standard Deviation
Concrete of each grade shall be analyzed separately to determine its standard
deviation.
The standard deviation of concrete of a given grade shall be calculated using the
following formula from the results of individual tests of concrete of that grade obtained
as specified for test strength of sample:
Estimated standard deviation
Where‘s’ is the deviation of the individual test strength from the average strength of a
sample and n is the number of sample test results.
When significant changes are made in the production of concrete (for example changes
in the materials used, mix design, equipment’s or technical control), the standard
deviation value shall be separately calculated for such batches of concrete.
Assumed Standard Deviation
Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not available, the
value of standard deviation given in table below may be assumed for design of mix in
the first instance. As soon as the results of samples are available, actual calculated
standard deviation shall be used and the mix designed properly. However, when
adequate past records for a similar grade exist and justify to the designer a value of
CS-04 0-78
standard deviation different from that shown in table below, it shall be permissible to use
that value.
Grade of Assumed Standard Deviation (N/mm2)
concrete
M 10 3.5
M 15
M 20 4.0
M25
M30 5.0
M35
M40
M45
M50
The above values correspond to the site control having proper storage of cement: weigh
batching of all materials, controlled addition of water, regular checking of all materials,
aggregate grading and moisture contents and periodical checking of workability: and
strength. Where there is deviation from the above, the values given in the above table
shall be increased by 1 N/mm2.
5.2.4 Cement Content of Concrete

For all grades of concrete produced, the minimum cement content in the concrete shall
be 330 kg per cubic meter of concrete. Irrespective of the grade of concrete, the
maximum cement content shall not be more than 500 kg per cubic meter of concrete.
These limitations shall apply for all types of cements of all strengths.
The actual cement content in each grade of concrete for various conditions of variable
shall be established by design mixes within the limits specified in the foregoing
paragraph.
5.2.5 Water Cement Ratio and Slump

In proportioning a particular mix, the Contractor shall give due consideration to the
moisture content in the aggregates, and the mix shall be so designed as to restrict the
maximum free water cement ratio to less than 0.5.
Due consideration shall be given to the workability of the concrete thus produced. Slump
shall be controlled on the basis of placement in different situations. For normal methods
of placing concrete, the maximum slump shall be restricted to 100 mm when measured
in accordance with IS 1199.
5.2.6 Approval of Design Mix

The Contractor shall submit details of each trial mix of each grade of concrete designed
for various workability conditions to the Engineer for his comments and approval.
Concrete of any particular design mix and grade shall be produced for works only on
obtaining written approval of the Engineer.
For any change in quality/ quantity in the ingredients of a particular concrete, for which
mix has been designed earlier and approved by the Engineer, the mix has to be
redesigned and approval obtained again.
The mixes once approved must not be varied without prior approval of the Engineer.
C S- 04 0 - 7 9
6. EXECUTION
6.1 Batching
In batching concrete, the quantity of various constituents shall be determined as follows
(see also IS 4925):
a. Cement and aggregate by mass.
b. Admixtures, if solid, by mass; however, liquid admixture may be measured in volume
or mass.
c. Water weighed or measured by volume in a calibrated tank.
Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that supply of properly
graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained over the period of work, the
grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining coarse aggregate in different sizes
and blending them in the right proportions when required, the aggregates of different
sizes being stocked in separate stockpiles. The material shall be stockpiled for several
hours, preferably a day, before use. The grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be
checked as frequently as possible, the frequency for a given job being determined by
the Engineer to ensure that the specified grading is maintained.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment for grading shall be within ±2% of the
quantity of cement being measured and within ±3% of the quantity of aggregate,
admixtures and water being measured.
The proportion/type and grading of aggregates shall be made by trial in such a way so
as to obtain the densest possible concrete. All ingredients of the concrete shall be used
by mass only.
Volume batching may be allowed only where weigh-batching is not practicable and
provided that accuracy used in concrete have earlier been established. Allowance for
bulking shall be made in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 3). The mass volume
relationship shall be checked as frequently as necessary, the frequency for the given job
being determined by Engineer to ensure that the specified grading is maintained.
In order to maintain the water cement ratio at its correct value, determination of moisture
contents in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be made as frequently as possible,
this frequency for being determined by the Engineer according to weather conditions.
The amount of the added water shall be adjusted to compensate for any observed
variations in moisture contents. For the determination of moisture content in the
aggregates, IS 2386 (Part 3) may be referred to. To allow for the variation in mass for
aggregate due to variations in their moisture content, suitable adjustments in the
masses of aggregates shall be made. In the absence of exact data and only in the case
of nominal mixes, the amount of surface water may be estimated from the values given
below:
Aggregate Approximate quantity of surface water
Percent by mass l/m3
Very wet sand 7.5 120
Moderately wet sand 5.0 80
Moist sand 2.5 40
Moist gravel or crushed 1.25-2.5 20-40
rock
No substitutions in materials used on the work or alteration in the established

proportions, except as permitted in above, shall be made without additional tests to
show that the quality and strength of concrete are satisfactory.
CS-04 0-80
6.2 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. However, in exceptional circumstances,
such as mechanical breakdown of mixer, work in remote areas or power breakdown and
when the quantity of concrete work is very small, hand mixing may be done with the
specific prior permission of the Engineer.
6.2.1 Mechanical Mixing

Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical batch type concrete mixers conforming to IS
1791 having two blades and fitted with power loader (lifting hopper type). Half bag
mixers and mixers without lifting hoppers shall not be used for mixing concrete.
Requirements of Mixer
The mixer will be fitted with a power loader complying with the following requirements:
a. The hopper shall be of adequate capacity to receive and discharge the maximum
nominal batch of unmixed materials without spillage under normal operating
conditions on a level site. In such a case, the volume of the maximum nominal
batch of mixed material is 50% greater than the nominal mixed batch capacity.
b. The minimum inside width of the feeding edge of the hopper shall be as follows:
Nominal size of Minimum inside width of

mixer2 (liter) hopper feeding edge
140 1.0
200 1.1
280 1.2
375 1.4
500 1.5
1000 2.0
c. The design of the loader shall be such that it allows the loading hopper to be
elevated to such a height that the centerline of the chute plate of the hopper, when
in discharge position, is at an angle of not less than 50º to the horizontal. A
mechanical device to aid discharge of the contents as quickly as possible from the
hopper to the drum may also be provided. Even when a mechanical device is
provided, it is recommended that the angle of centerline of the chute plate of the
hopper, when in discharge position, should be as larger as practicable, preferably
not less than 40º to horizontal.
d. When the means of raising and lowering the loading hopper includes flexible wire
ropes winding on to a drum or drums, the method of fastening the wire to rope to the
drums shall be such as to avoid, as far as possible, any tendency to cut the strands
of the ropes and the fastening should preferably be positioned clear of the barrel of
the drum for example, outside the drums flange. When the loading hopper is
lowered to its normal loading position, these should be at least one and a half drums
of rope on the drum.
e. Clutch brake and hydraulic control lever shall be designed so as to prevent
displacement by liberation or by accidental contact with any person.
f. The clutch and brake control arrangements shall also be so designed that the
operator can control the falling speed of the loader.
2
Tilting, non-tilting or reverse type
C S- 04 0 - 8 1
g. Safety device shall be provided to secure the hopper in raised position when not in
use.
Mixing Efficiency
The mixer shall be tested under normal working conditions in accordance with the
method specified in IS 4643 with a view to check its ability to mix the ingredients to
obtain concrete having uniformity within the prescribed limits. The uniformity of mixed
concrete shall be evaluated by finding the percentage variation in quantity (mass in
water) of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in a freshly mixed batch of
concrete. The percentage variation between the quantities of cement, fine aggregate
and coarse aggregates (as found by weighing in water) in the two halves of a batch and
average of the two halves of the batch shall not be more than the following limits:
cement 8%, fine aggregate 6% and coarse aggregate 5%.
Mixing
Prior to mixing, the mixer drum shall be flushed clean with water. A measured quantity
of coarse aggregate shall be placed first in the hopper. This shall be followed with a
measured quantity of fine aggregate and then cement. In case the fine aggregate is
damp, half of the required quantity of coarse aggregate shall be placed in the hopper,
followed by fine aggregate and cement. Finally, the balance quantity of coarse
aggregate shall be fed in the hopper, and the dry materials shall be slipped into the
drum by raising the hopper. The dry materials shall be mixed for at least four turns of the
drum. While the drum is rotating, water shall be added gradually to achieve the water
cement ratio as specified or as required by the Engineer. Thereafter, the mixing shall be
continued until concrete of uniform colour with uniformly distributed material and
consistency is obtained. Mixing shall be done for at least two minutes after adding water
and at least forty revolutions after all the materials and water are in the drum. When
absorbent aggregates are used or when the mix is very dry, the mixing time shall be
extended as may be directed by the Engineer. Mixer shall not be loaded above their
rated capacity as this prevents thorough mixing. If there is segregation after unloading
from the mixer, the concrete should be remixed.
The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before the ingredients for the next
batch are fed into the drum. No partly set or remixed or excessively wet concrete shall
be used and it shall be immediately removed from site.
When the mixer is closed down for the day or at any time exceeding 20 minutes, the
mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. When the next mixing commences, the first mix shall
have 10% additional cement at no extra cost to the Employer to allow for loss in the
drum.
6.2.2 Hand Mixing

When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer, mixing shall be carried out on a
smooth, clean and watertight platform of suitable size. Care shall be taken to ensure
that mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. In case of
hand mixing, 10% extra cement shall be added to each batch with no extra cost to the
Employer.
For mixing, the measured quantity of sand shall be spread evenly on the platform, and
the cement shall be dumped on the sand and distributed evenly. Sand and cement shall
be mixed intimately with a spade until mixture is of even colour throughout. The
measured quantity of coarse aggregate shall be spread on top of cement sand mixture,
and mixing shall be done by shoveling and turning till the coarse aggregate gets evenly
distributed in the cement sand mixture. Three quarters of the total quantity of water
required shall be added in a hollow made in the middle of the mixed pile, and the
material shall be turned towards the middle of pile with a spade. The whole mixture shall
be turned slowly over and over again, and the remaining quantity of water is added
gradually. The mixing shall be continued until concrete of uniform colour and
CS-04 0-82
consistency is obtained. The mixing platform shall be washed and cleaned at the end of
the day.
Before mixing, stone aggregate or gravel shall be washed with water to remove, dirt,
dust and other foreign materials. For guidance, the mixing time may be 1.5 to 2 minutes;
however, it may be taken as 2.5 to 3 minutes for hydrophobic cement.
6.3 Consistency
Concrete which can flow sluggishly into forms and around reinforcement without any
segregation of coarse aggregate from the mortar shall be used. The consistency shall
depend on whether the concrete is vibrated on or hand tamped. It shall be determined
by slump test as prescribed for workability.
6.4 Conveying Concrete

Concrete shall be handled and conveyed from the place of mixing to the place of final
deposit as rapidly as practicable by approved means before the initial setting of the
cement starts. Concrete should be conveyed in such a way as will prevent segregation
or loss of any of the ingredients. If segregation does occur during transport, the concrete
shall be remixed. During very hot or cold weather, if directed by the Engineer, concrete
shall be transported in deep containers that will reduce the rate of loss of water by
evaporation and loss of heat. Conveying equipment for concrete shall be well
maintained and thoroughly cleaned before commencement of concrete mixing. Such
equipment shall be kept free from set concrete.
6.5 Preparations for Placing Concrete

Before the concrete is placed, the shuttering shall be trued up and any water
accumulated therein shall be removed. All saw dust, chips, nails, and other debris shall
be washed out or otherwise removed from within the formwork. The reinforcement shall
then be inspected for accuracy of fixing. Immediately before placing the concrete, the
formwork shall be well wetted and inspection opening closed. Formwork and
reinforcement shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to placing of concrete.
6.6 Placing of Concrete

The interval between adding the water to the dry mix and completion of the concrete
placing operation shall not exceed 30 minutes nor exceed 10 minutes when an
approved admixture that accelerates the initial setting of the cement be used. All
concrete shall be placed during daylight only unless otherwise approved.
Except where otherwise approved for slabs and large sections, concrete shall be placed
in the formwork by shovels or other approved implements and shall not be dropped from
height nor handled in a manner to cause separation. As a general guidance, the
maximum free fall of concrete may be taken as 1.5 m. Accumulations of handled
concrete dropping on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be sorted
along the formwork to that position. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of
reinforcement or movement of formwork.
While being placed, each layer of concrete shall be consolidated by approved methods
of ramming, tamping or mechanical vibrations to form a dense surface free from honey
combing and tolerably free from watermarks and air holes or other blemishes. The
concrete shall be tamped against the face of the formwork so as to produce dense fair
surface. The type of mechanical vibrations shall be approved before consolidating by
vibration. Placing and consolidation of concrete shall be done in such a manner as not
to disturb concrete already placed, and reinforcement projecting from concrete already
placed shall not be vibrated or jarred. For concreting reinforced concrete walls and other
structures having least lateral dimensions of 150 mm, each layer of concrete shall be
properly consolidated by approved methods of mechanical vibrations produced by
internal or external mechanical vibration.
C S- 04 0 - 8 3
Unless otherwise approved or instructed, concrete shall be placed in a single operation

to the full depth of slabs, beams and members similar thereto and shall be placed in
horizontal layers not exceeding 60 mm depth in walls and columns until completion of
the part of the work between construction joints of the form and in the position herein
after specified shall be made. If a temporary cessation of concrete placing be
unavoidable elsewhere, a construction joint shall likewise be made.
No concrete shall be placed in open, while it rains. If there has been any sign of
separation of cement and sand by washing, the concrete shall be entirely removed
immediately. Suitable precautions shall be taken in advance to guard against rains
before leaving the fresh concrete at site. Any water accumulating on the surface of the
newly placed concrete shall be removed by approved means, and no further concrete
shall be placed thereon until such water is removed. No fresh concrete shall be brought
into contact with concrete containing cement of different type.
The workability of the concrete shall be checked at frequent intervals by slump test.
Where facilities exist and if required by the Engineer, alternatively, the compacting factor
test in accordance with IS: 1199 (latest revision), shall be carried out. It should be noted
that the slump to be obtained for work in progress shall be as per the direction of the
Engineer.
6.7 Compaction
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around embedded fixtures
and into corners of the formwork. Compaction shall be completed before the initial
setting starts. Compaction shall be done by mechanical vibrator of appropriate type till a
dense concrete is obtained. The mechanical vibrators shall conform to IS 2505, IS 2506,
IS 2514 and IS 4656. For the items where mechanical vibrators are not to be used, the
Contractor shall take permission of the Engineer in writing before the start of the work.
To prevent segregation, over vibration shall be avoided.
The concrete that is to be compacted by vibration should appear anything from earth dry
to slightly glistening, and the mix should have the appearance of lacking in fines. While
placing, segregation is likely to take place when the concrete is tipped into the formwork
and this should be avoided. The concrete mix should not contain surplus water and
sand that will develop segregation under influence of vibratory compaction.
The distribution of new concrete should be uniform for the whole section and the surface
kept horizontal the whole time, thus ensuring the movement of concrete downward only.
Vibrators shall not be used as a spreading or distribution agent.
Vibration shall continue during the whole period occupied by placing the concrete, the
vibration being adjusted so that the center of vibration approximates to the center of the
mass being compacted at the time of placing. The concrete should not be over vibrated,
and the period of insertion of internal vibrator should be about 15 seconds at any point.
The compactness of concrete shall be judged when the mortar fills the spaces between
the coarse aggregate so as to form a glistening and even surface except for slight
irregularities where the coarse aggregate breaks this smooth surface. When this
condition has been attained, the vibrator shall be withdrawn slowly. The vibrator must
not be placed against the steel or the formwork, the minimum distance between the two
being 75 mm. The compressor must be placed in such a position that formwork,
reinforcement and recently laid concrete are subjected to the minimum amount of
vibration.
6.8 Construction Joints

When the work is to be interrupted, the concrete shall be rebated at the joint to such
shape and size as may be required by the Engineer or as shown on the drawing. Such
construction joints shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be, except that in
an inclined or curved members the joints shall be strictly at right angles to the axis of the
CS-04 0-84
member. All vertical construction joints shall be made with step boards, which are rigidly
fixed and slotted to allow for the passage of the reinforcing steel. If desired by the
Engineer keys and/or dowel bars shall be provided at the construction joints. In the case
of water retaining structures, water stops of approved material shall be provided if so
specified in the drawings or desired by the Engineer. Construction joints shall be
provided in positions as described, the joints shall be in accordance with the followings:
Construction joints shall be made horizontally at the top of the foundations and
horizontally 75 mm below the lowest beam coffin at the head of columns. Concrete in
the ribs and slabs of tee and ell beams shall be placed in one operation, but, for large
beams, concrete in the rib up to a level 25 mm below the slab coffin shall be placed first.
Concrete in haunches or splays on the beams or braces and concrete in the head of
adjoining portion of the columns shall be placed at the same time as that in the beams
or braces. Concrete in splays at the junction of walls and slabs shall be placed at the
same time as that in the slab. Construction joints in the length of a beam shall be
avoided where practicable, but where joints are unavoidable, they shall be made as
previously approved by the Engineer. Construction joints in slabs shall be made parallel
to the main reinforcement, and where required at right angles to the main reinforcement,
they shall be made at a place previously approved by the Engineer.
Before fresh concrete is placed, the cement skin of the partially hardened concrete shall
be thoroughly removed and surface made rough by hacking, sand blasting, water
jetting, air jetting or any other method as directed by the Engineer. The rough surface
shall be thoroughly wetted for about two hours and shall be dried and coated with 1:1
freshly mixed cement sand slurry before placing the new concrete. The new concrete
shall be worked against the prepared surface before the slurry sets. Special care must
always be taken to see that the first layer of concrete placed after a construction joint is
cold. Joints during pour shall be treated with 1:1 freshly made cement sand slurry only
after removing all loose materials.
6.9 Protection and Curing of Concrete

After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. about 1 to 2 hours after its laying,
concrete surfaces not covered by forms shall be protected from loss of surface moisture
for at least seven days when the average daily temperature is at least 10 °C. Protection
from loss of surface water shall be done by any of the following methods where
applicable to the type of work involved:
a. By moist curing.
b. By covering of surface with water-impervious paper.
c. By application of approved impervious membrane-curing compounds.
Moist curing shall be performed by keeping the concrete surface wet by ponding, by
continuous spraying or by covering the surface with an approved water-saturated
covering such as 25 mm sand or sawdust, or wet gunny jute bags. The exposed
concrete surfaces shall be saturated with water for at least seven days from the date of
placing concrete in case of ordinary Portland cement and at least 10 days where mineral
admixtures or blended cements are used. The period of curing shall not be less than 10
days for concrete exposed to dry and hot weather conditions. In the case of concrete
where mineral admixtures or blended cements are used, the above minimum period
may be extended to 14 days. Where forms remain in places during the curing period,
they shall be kept sufficiently wetted with clean water to reduce cracks and to prevent
joints from opening in the forms.
Impermeable membrane such as polythene sheet covering the concrete surface may
also be used to provide effective barrier against the evaporation. Surfaces from which
forms have been removed before the curing period has elapsed shall be protected as
specified for surfaces not covered by forms.
C S- 04 0 - 8 5
Impervious membrane-curing compound shall be an approved non-bituminous,

colorless, liquid sealing compound in atomized form so as to preserve the natural colour
of the concrete. The curing compound shall be applied as soon as surface water has
disappeared from the concrete surface with approved pressure spraying equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions and in sufficient thickness to form an
effective water seal. Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces required to receive
additional concrete or concrete fill, nor on cement finish coats that are to receive dust
proofing or hardening treatments, nor during hot weather. Joints of sheet membrane
used for curing shall be lapped at least 150 mm and sealed with waterproof tape as
recommended by the manufacturer. No liquid curing compound may be used without
specific written approval of the Engineer regarding type, manufacturer, location and
extent of use and application procedures.
Over foundation concrete, masonry work may be started after 48 hours of its
compaction but the curing of exposed surfaces of cement concrete shall be continued
along with the masonry work for at least seven days. Where cement concrete is used as
base concrete for flooring, the flooring may be commenced before the curing period of
base concrete is over but the curing of base concrete shall be continued along with top
layer of flooring for a minimum period of seven days.
6.10 Finishes
Immediately after stripping the formwork, minor defects and honeycombed areas shall
be patched and holes filled before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Patch areas shall be
chipped away to 25 mm depth with regular edges perpendicular to the surface. The
areas to be patched shall be thoroughly wetted, including the areas at least 150 mm
wide entirely surrounding them, just prior to placing the patching mortar. Mortar shall be
of the same material and proportions as used for the concrete without coarse
aggregate. A sufficient quantity of white cement shall be substituted for part of the
ordinary cement so that the patching mortar, when dry, will be more or less of the same
colour for exposed concrete finish and will match the surrounding concrete. Water in the
mix shall be kept to a minimum and mortar shall be re-tempered without adding water
and shall be allowed to stand for one hour prior to use. Mortar shall be thoroughly
compacted into place, screeded so as to leave the patch slightly higher than
surrounding surfaces, left undisturbed for one to two hours to permit initial shrinkage
and finished to match the adjoining work.
Where patches exceed 25 mm depth, they shall be trimmed and wetted as specified,
after which the opening shall be filled to within 25 mm of the surface. After sufficient
shrinkage time has elapsed, the patching shall proceed as described above. Patches
shall be kept wet for 7 days.
Tie holes left by the withdrawal of rods, or holes left by removal of ends of ties, shall be
filled solidly with mortar. For holes passing entirely through the wall, plunger-type grease
gun or other device to force mortar through the wall, starting at the back face, shall be
used. When a hole is completely filled, excess mortar shall be struck off with a cloth
flush with the surface holes not passing entirely through walls shall be filled solidly with
mortar. Any excess mortar shall be struck off with a cloth flush with the surface. Holes
not passing entirely through walls shall be filled solidly with mortar. The surface of non-
shuttered faces of concrete work other than slabs shall be smoothed with a wooden
float (or, if approved, with a steel trowel) to give a finish equal to that of the rubbed down
shuttered faces. Concealed concrete faces shall be left as is except that honeycombed
surfaces shall be made good.
The top faces of slabs not intended to be surfaced shall be leveled and floated to a
smooth finish at the levels or falls shown on the drawings or elsewhere. The floating
shall not be executed to the extent of bringing excess fine material to the surface.
Ribbed surfaces of slabs shall, where instructed, be formed by approved implements
giving the depth and patterns instructed. The top faces of slabs intended to be covered
CS-04 0-86
with creed, granolithic or similar surfacing shall be left with a spade finish. The soffits of
slabs and faces of wall intended to be rendered shall be roughened by approved means
to form a key.
Concrete surfaces to take finishes other than those specifically referred to herein shall
be prepared in an approved manner to suit the finish as instructed.
7. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS
7.1 Work in Extreme Weather Conditions

During hot and cold weather, concreting shall be done as per the procedure set out in IS
7861 (Part I) and IS 7861 (Part II), respectively. Concreting shall not be done when the
temperature falls below 4.5 ºC. In cold weather, the placed concrete shall be protected
against frost. During hot weather, it shall be ensured that the temperature of wet
concrete does not exceed 38 ºC.
7.2 Underwater Concreting

Concrete shall not be deposited under water if it is practicable to dewater the area and
place concrete in the regular manner. When it is necessary to deposit concrete under
water, the methods, equipment, materials and proportions of the mix to be used shall be
submitted to and approved by the Engineer before the work is started.
Underwater concrete should have a slump recommended in Section 4. The water-
cement ratio shall not exceed 0.6 and may need to be smaller, depending on the grade
of concrete or the type of chemical attack. For aggregates of 40 mm maximum particle
size, the cement content shall be at least 350 kg per cubic meter of concrete.
8. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH TEST OF CONCRETE
8.1 Sampling
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS 1199 and cubes shall be made,
cured and tested at 28 days in accordance with IS 516.
In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete, option tests on beams
for modulus of rupture at 72 (±) 2 hours or at 7 days or compressive strength tests at 7
days may be carried out in addition to 28 days compressive strength tests. For this
purpose, the values given in table below may be taken for general guidance in the case
of concrete made with ordinary cement. In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength
specified shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete. If,
however, from test carried out in particular job over a reasonably long period, it has
been established to the satisfaction of the Engineer that a suitable ratio between 28
days compressive strength and modulus of rupture at 72 (±) 2 hours or 7 days or
compressive strength at 7 days may be accepted, the Engineer may suitably relax the
frequency of 28 days compressive strength, provided the expected strength values at
the specified early age are consistently met.
Grade of Compressive strength on Modulus of rupture by beam test
concrete 15 cm cubes min. at 7 days (min.)
At 72 (±) 2 hours, At 7 days, N/mm2
2
N/mm
M 10 7.0 1.2 1.7
M 15 10.0 1.5 2.1
M 20 13.5 1.7 2.4
M 25 17.0 1.9 2.7
M 30 20.0 2.1 3.0
M 35 23.5 2.3 3.2
C S- 04 0 - 8 7
M 40 27.0 2.5 3.4
8.2 Sampling Procedure

A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch shall
have a reasonable chance of being tested, i.e. the sampling should be spread over the
entire period of concreting and cover all mixing units.
8.3 Frequency
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as follows:
Quantity of concrete in Number of samples
the work (in cu m.)
1-5 1
6-15 2
16-30 3
31-50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional for each
additional 50 cum. or part there of
At least one sample shall be taken from each shift. Where concrete is continuous
production unit, such as ready-mix concrete plant, frequency of sampling may be as
directed by the engineer.
8.4 Test Specimen

Three test specimen shall be made from each sample for testing at 28 days. Additional
cubes may be required for various purposes, such as to determine the strength of
concrete at 7 days or at the time of striking the formwork or to determine the duration of
curing or to check the testing error. Additional cubes may also be required for testing
cubes cured by accelerated methods as described in IS 9013. The specimen shall be
tested as per IS 516.
8.5 Testing
The samples of concrete shall be tested in an approved laboratory in the presence of
the Engineer, and the test results shall be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall carry out the sampling and testing according to the provisions of this
Specification at his own cost. No payment shall be made for the concrete used in
specimens.
8.6 Test Strength of Samples

The test strength of the samples shall be the average of the strength of three specimen.
The individual variation should not be more than ± 15% of the average. The standard
deviation shall be as per Section 5.2.3.
8.7 Consistency
To control the consistency of concrete from every mixing plant, slump test shall be
carried out as often as demanded by the Engineer and invariably from the same batch
of concrete from which the test cubes are made. Slump tests shall be done immediately
after sampling
8.8 Tests on Materials

The Engineer, if he so desires, may order special tests to be carried out on cement,
sand or coarse aggregates, water, reinforcing steel or traverse tests in accordance with
IS recommendations. If the material tested in found to be suitable for the intended use,
the cost of these special tests shall be borne by the Employer. However, if the material
CS-04 0-88
is found not suitable for the intended use, the cost of these special tests shall be borne
by the Contractor.
8.9 Sampling Facilities in Field

If the Engineer desires, facilities required for sampling materials and concrete in the field
shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost. The following equipment with
operator shall be made available at the Engineer’s request (all must be in serviceable
condition)
SN Equipment Quantity
1. Cast iron cube moulds 15 cm size 12 Nos. (min.)
2. Slump cone complete with tamping rod 1 set
3. Lab. balance to weigh up to 5 kg with sensitivity of 10 gm 1 No.
4. Laboratory balance of 2 kg capacity and of sensitivity of 1 1 No.
gm
5. I.S. sieves for coarse and fine aggregates 1 Set
6. A set of measures from 5 l to 0.1 l 1 Set
7. Electric oven with thermostat up to 120 ºC 1 No.
8. Pycnometer 1 No.
9. Calibrated glass jar 1 l capacity 2 Nos.
10 Glass flasks and metal containers As required
11 Concrete cube testing machine (optional) 1 No.
9. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
9.1 Compressive Strength

The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirements when both the
following condition are met:
a. The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results
complies with the appropriate limits in the second column of the following table.
b. Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in the third column of
the following table.
Specified Mean of group of 4 non-overlapping Individual test

grade consecutive test results (N/mm2) results (N/mm2)
M15 ≥ fck + 0.825 x established standard ≥ fck-3 N/mm2
deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5
N/mm2) or fck +3 N/mm2, whichever is
greater
M20 or above ≥ fck + 0.825 x established standard ≥ fck-4 N/mm2
deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5
N/mm2) or fck +4 N/mm2, whichever is
greater
In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the values given in Table may
be assumed, and attempt should be made to obtain results of 30 samples as early as
possible to establish the value of standard deviation.
9.2 Flexural Strength

When both the following conditions are met, the concrete shall be taken to comply with
the specified flexural strength:
C S- 04 0 - 8 9
a. The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results
. least 0.3 N/mm2.
exceeds the specified characteristic strength by at
b. The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified
characteristic strength by 0.3 N/mm2.
9.3 Quantity of Concrete Represented by Strength Test Results

The quantity of concrete represented by a group of four consecutive test results shall
include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken together with all
intervening batches.
For the individual test result requirements given in the third column of the above table or
in item b under compressive strength, only the particular batch from which the sample
was taken shall be at risk.
Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified, the maximum quantity of concrete
that four consecutive test results represent shall be limited to 60 m3.
If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant to this section, the structural adequacy
of the parts affected shall be investigated and any consequential action as needed shall
be taken.
Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.
Concrete shall be liable to be rejected if it is porous or honey-combed, its placing has
been interrupted without providing a proper construction joint, the reinforcement has
been displaced beyond the tolerances specified or construction tolerances have not
been met. However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after carrying out suitable
remedial measured to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Concrete work found unsuitable shall have to be dismantled and replacement to be
done as per specification by the Contractor. No payment for the dismantled concrete,
the relevant formwork and reinforcement embedded fixtures, etc. shall be made. In
course of dismantling, if any damage is done to the embedded items or adjacent
structures, the same shall be made good free of charge by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
10. PRECAST CONCRETE
10.1 General Requirements

Precast concrete and precast reinforced concrete units shall comply with IS 456. They
shall be of grade of mix as specified and cast in forms or moulds. The forms/ moulds
shall be of fiberglass or of steel sections for better finish. Provision shall be made in the
forms and moulds to accommodate fixing devices such as nibs, clips, hooks, bolts and
forming of notches and holes.
Precast concrete shall be cast on suitable bed or platform with firm foundation. The
Contractor may precast the units on a cement or steel platform which shall be
adequately oiled, provided the surface finish is of the same standard as obtained in the
forms. Each unit shall be cast in one operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the accuracy of the level or shape of the bed or platform. A suitable serial number and
the date of casting shall be impressed or painted on each unit.
Concrete used for pre-casting the units should be well proportioned as specified, mixed,
placed and thoroughly compacted by vibrations or tamping to give a dense concrete free
from voids and honeycombing.
Precast articles shall have a dense surface finish showing no coarse aggregate and
shall have no cracks or crevices likely to assist in disintegration of concrete or rusting of
steel or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the units. All angles
of the precast units, with the exception of the angles resulting from the splayed or
CS-04 0-90
chamfered faces, shall be true right angles. The rises shall be clean and sharp except
those specified or shown to be rounded. The wearing surface shall be true to the lines.
On being fractured, the interior of the units should present a clean homogenous
appearance.
The longitudinal reinforcement shall have a minimum cover of 12 mm or twice the
diameter of the main bar, whichever is more, unless otherwise directed in respect of all
items, except fencing posts or electric posts where the minimum cover shall be 25 mm.
10.2 Curing
After having been cast in the mould or form, the concrete shall be adequately protected
during setting in the first stages of hardening from shocks and from harmful effects of
frost, sunshine, drying winds and cold.
All precast work shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun for at least 7 days
after casting. During this period, each unit shall be kept constantly watered or preferably
be completely immersed in water if the size of unit so permits. Otherwise, curing
practices as given in clauses stated earlier shall be followed.
The precast articles shall be matured for 28 days before erection or being built in so that
the concrete shall have sufficient strength to prevent damage to units when first
handled. Side shutters shall not be struck in less than 24 hours after depositing
concrete, and no precast unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches strength of at
least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of lifting.
10.3 Marking
Precast units shall be clearly marked to indicate the top of member and its location and
orientation in the structure.
10.4 Storage, Transportation and Placing

Precast units shall be stored, transported and placed in position in such a manner that
they will not be overstressed or damaged. The lifting and removal of precast units shall
be undertaken without causing shocks, vibration or under bending stresses to or in the
units. Before lifting and removal takes place, the Contractor shall satisfy Engineer or his
representative that the methods he proposes to adopt for these operations will not over-
stress or otherwise affect seriously the strength of the precast units. The reinforced side
of the units shall be distinctly marked.
11. LOAD TESTS ON STRUCTURE
The Engineer shall instruct that a loading test be made on the works or any part thereof
if, in his opinion, such a test be deemed necessary for one or more of the following
reasons.
a. The site made concrete test cubes failing to attain the specified strength is not
acceptable as per “Acceptance Criteria” of IS: 456 - (latest revision).
b. Over loading during construction of the works or part thereof.
c. Concrete improperly cured.
d. Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of the
Contractor that, in the opinion of the Engineer, may result in the works or part
thereof having less than the expected strength.
e. Any reason other than the foregoing.
If the loading test be instructed to be made solely or in part for the reason above, the
test shall be made at the Contractor’s own cost.
C S- 04 0 - 9 1
For the purpose of a loading test on floors, roofs and similar structures and their
supports, the member under consideration shall be subjected to a superimposed load
equal to one and a quarter (1.25) times the specified superimposed load used for
design, and this load shall be maintained for a period of 24 hours before removal. The
deflection due to the imposed load only shall be recorded. If, within 24 hours of removal
of the imposed load, the structure does not recover at least 75% of the deflection under
superimposed load, the test may be repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the recovery is
less than 80 percent, the structure shall be deemed to be unacceptable. If the maximum
deflection in mm shown during the 24 hours under load is less than 40 l 2/D, where l is
the effective length in m and D the overall depth of the section in mm, it is not necessary
for the recovery to be measured, and the above mentioned recovery provisions shall not
apply.
Other non-destructive test methods may by adopted, in which case the acceptance
criteria shall be agreed upon between the Engineer and the Contractor, and the test
shall be done under expert guidance.
If the member shows evident failure, such changes as are necessary to make the
structure adequately strong shall be made free of cost. If on the other hand, the failure
becomes evident, the Engineer under special circumstances (with the approval of the
designer), can retain the portion of the structure under test, provided suitable
modification for strengthening and/or dispersion of design load is feasible. Cost of such
modification of dispersion of load shall be borne by the Contractor.
If the result of the loading test is not satisfactory, the Engineer shall instruct that part of
the works concerned shall be taken down or removed and reconstructed to comply with
this specification, or that such other remedial measures shall be taken to make the
works secure. If the test be instructed to be made for one or more of the reasons (a) to
(e) inclusive as herein before specified, the Contractor shall take down or remove and
reconstruct the defective works or shall take the remedial measures instructed at his
own cost.
If in the course of dismantling, any damage is done to the embedded items and or other
adjacent structures, the same shall be made good free of charge by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of Engineer.
12. OPENINGS AND EMBEDMENTS
The Contractor shall leave all openings, grooves, chases, etc. in concrete work as
shown on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer. He shall build into the concrete
work all the materials noted below and shall embed and secure the same as and when
required. The materials are required to be supplied by the Contractor, shall be of best
quality available of approved manufacture and shall be up to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The following materials may be embedded:
a. Inserts, hangers, anchors, opening frames, manholes, covers, floor clips, sleeves
and conduits.
b. Anchor bolts and plates for machinery, equipment and for structural steel work.
c. Dowels bars, etc. for concrete work falling under scope of future works.
d. Lugs or plugs for door and window frames occurring in concrete work.
e. Flashing and jointing in concrete work.
f. Any other built-in-fixtures as may be required.
Correct location, exact alignment, etc. of all these shall be entirely the responsibility of
the Contractor.
CS-04 0-92
13.1 Measurement
Measurement of concrete for payment will be made only to the neat lines of the
structures, excluding finishes, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the
Engineer. Dimensions of length, breadth and thickness shall be measured correct to
nearest 10 mm except for the thickness of slab and partition which shall be measured to
nearest 5 mm. Areas shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sq. m, and the cubic contents
of consolidated concrete shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cu m. Any work done in
excess over the specified dimension or sections shown in the Drawing shall be ignored.
In measuring concrete for payment, the areas/ volume of all cavities, depressions,
openings, embedded pipes, woodwork and metal work, except reinforcement bars and
anchor bolts and bars, will be deducted.
13.2 Payment
Payment for concreting works shall be made at the unit rates per cubic meter quoted in
the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and
equipment required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing and hauling
cement, its storage, protection, etc. all complete, but excluding the costs of furnishing
and placing reinforcement bars, which shall be paid separately.
C S- 04 0 - 9 3
STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers providing and fixing steel reinforcement of various sizes in all
types of RCC works, including necessary supports, spacers, tie wire and accessories.
1.2 Standards
The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or
approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein:
a. IS 456 – 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete
b. IS 432 (Part 1) – 1982: Specification for Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars
and Hard-drawn Steel Wire Concrete Reinforcement
c. IS 1139 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for
Concrete Reinforcement
d. IS 1786 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for
Concrete Reinforcement
e. IS 2502 – 1963: Code of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Bar Bending Schedule

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer bar bending schedules for all RCC works in
duplicate within one month of the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance or of the receipt of
each design drawings, whichever is later. Upon receipt of the Engineer’s final
corrections, as-corrected two copies of the approved drawings/schedules shall be
submitted to the Engineer. The bar bending schedule shall be in standard format
covering serial number, shape, diameter, number, length of bar, total length, unit weight
per meter of bar and total weight of individual bar inclusive of the grand total weight of
bar/reinforcement.
The contractor shall also furnish additional bar bending schedules as per drawings
during construction phase if necessary.
Approval of schedule/drawing by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for errors nor relieve him of any part of his obligation to meet the entire
requirements of the Contract or of the responsibility for the correctness of his drawings.
The submission of bar bending schedule as of design drawings shall be prior to the
commencement of the activity of structural concreting works and prior approval from the
Engineer. The contractor’s submittal shall be on time in order to make the progress as of
scheduled work plan.
1.3.2 Test Certificates

For each consignment of bar reinforcement used in the works, the Contractor shall, if
required, supply a certificate giving the ultimate strength, yield stress and elongation
and the result of the cold bend test for each type and each size of bar. The equivalent
CS-05 0-94
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S S T EE L RE I N FO R C E ME N T F O R C ON CR ET E
tests shall be carried out by the contractor on behalf of the Engineer for the purpose of
obtaining the information and conform to relevant IS code at his own cost.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Reinforcement
Bar reinforcement described as “mild steel” shall be plain, round hot rolled steel bars of
grade Fe 250, where the figure following Fe indicated the specified minimum 0.2% proof
stress or yield stress in N/mm2. Bar reinforcement described as “Tor steel” shall be hot
rolled, deformed bars or cold twisted steel bars of grade Fe 415. Likewise, bars
described as “TMT” shall be thermo-mechanically treated deformed steel bars of grade
Fe 500. With respect to manufacture, quality, physical properties and related
requirements, reinforcement of the foregoing description shall comply with appropriate
parts of the latest versions of IS: 432 for mild steel and IS: 1786 for tor steel and TMT.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting due to corrosion, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil,
grease, adhering earth, ice or other materials that may impair the bond between the
concrete and the reinforcement or that may, in the opinion the of the Engineer, cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. Adhering lime wash or
cement grout shall be permitted.
Each reinforcing bars shall be tested, and any bar showing cracks or flows or scales
shall not be used. The size of a reinforcement bar described on the working drawings or
elsewhere shall be the minimum, and the rolling margin and other tolerances shall be
wholly above this size.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Bending
Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing steel shall be bent in accordance with procedure
specified in the latest revision of IS 2502 or as approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcement bars shall be bent by machine or other approved means producing a
gradual and even motion. All the bars shall be cold bent unless otherwise approved.
Bends and shapes shall comply strictly with the dimensions in the approved bar bending
schedule. Bars correctly bent shall only be used. No reinforcement shall be bent when in
position in the work without the approval of the Engineer, whether or not the
reinforcement is partially embedded in concrete. Bars shall not be straightened in a
manner that will injure the materials. Re-bending can be done only if approved by the
Engineer.
3.2 Placing in Position

All reinforcement shall be accurately placed in position as shown on the Drawings. The
placing of reinforcement bars shall be completed well in advance of concrete pouring.
The reinforcement shall be checked by the Engineer for accuracy of placement and
cleanliness and necessary corrections prior to pouring the concrete.
Bars intended to be in contact at crossing points shall be securely bound together at all
such points by No. 20 BG annealed soft iron wire or by tack welding (in the case of mild
and tor steels only), as directed by the Engineer. Binders and the like shall be tightly
embraced with the bars with which they are intended to be in contact and shall be
securely held.
The vertical distance between successive layers of bars shall be placed by provision of
mild steel spacer bars. They should be so spaced that the main bars do not sag
perceptibly between adjacent spaces.
Concrete blocks shall be used for ensuring the cover and positioning of reinforcement.
They shall be made of mortar of mix one part cement to two parts sand by volume and
C S- 05 0 - 9 5
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S S T E E L R E I N F O R C E ME N T F O R C O N C R E T E
cured for at least seven days. The sizes and locations of concrete blocks shall be as
approved by the Engineer.
Laps and anchorage lengths of reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with latest
revision of IS: 456 unless otherwise specified. If the bars in a lap are of different
diameter, the smaller diameter shall guide the lap length. The laps shall be staggered as
far as practicable and as directed by the Engineer. Where required or indicated in
Drawings, mechanical couplers shall be used for lapping bars.
Except in the case of TMT bars, welding by gas or electricity may be permitted by the
Engineer under suitable conditions and with suitable safe guards in accordance with the
relevant I.S. However, welding between ends of a bar in line whereby stress is
transferred across the section may be allowed for mild steel bars only.
3.3 Exposed Reinforcement

Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already concreted shall not be
bent out of its correct position for any reason unless they are protected from deformation
or other damage. Reinforcement left projecting for bending for future extension shall be
thoroughly coated with cement grout wash, encased in concrete or otherwise protected
from corrosion, as approved by the Engineer.
3.4 Cover to Reinforcement

Unless otherwise specifically stated anywhere in the Contract, the clear cover to the
main reinforcement for structural members (footings, columns, beams and slabs) shall
conform to those specified in IS 456.
3.5 Cleaning
Before placing concrete, the reinforcement shall be cleaned of loose rust, oil, grease,
paint or other harmful matters that could impair bond with concrete. Rust shall be
removed by wire brushing, by rubbing with burlap or by equivalent means.
3.6 Inspection
Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer has inspected the reinforcing steel and
given his permission to place concrete. Concrete placed in violation of this requirement
will be subject to removal and rejection, at the Contractor’s expense.
4.1 Measurement
Reinforcement shall be measured in kg or metric tons computed based on drawings and
the approved bar bending schedule using the theoretical unit weights of reinforcement.
No allowance in weight shall be allowed for cutting to waste, rolling margin, extra length
or other tolerance. Standard hooks and laps, as approved, shall be measured for
payment. However, chairs, spacer bars, etc. shall not be measured.
4.2 Payment
Payment for reinforcement shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of
Quantities. The unit rate shall include supply and delivery, unloading, hauling, storing,
sorting, cutting, bending, cleaning, placing and securing and maintaining in position all
reinforcement bars, as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, including
material and labour for the complete works. Nothing extra shall be paid for preparation
of the bar bending schedule and testing.
CS-05 0-96
FORMWORK FOR RCC
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers centering and shuttering works for RCC works of any size,
shape etc., at any level, including strutting, propping and removal thereof.
1.2 Standards
The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards (or
approved equal) except as they are modified and supplemented herein:
a. IS: 456 – 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete
b. IS: 2750 – 1964: Specification for Steel Scaffoldings.
1.3 Tolerances
The formwork shall be so made as to produce finished concrete that is true to shape,
lines, levels, plumb and dimensions as shown on the Drawings, subject to the following
tolerance unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification or Drawings or
directed by the Engineer:
a. Sectional dimension: 5 mm
b. Plumb: 1 in 1000 of height
c. Levels: 3 mm before any deflection has taken place
1.4 Submittals
All formwork shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The formwork shall safely support the static and live loads that
could be applied to it during construction, maintenance and removal. The deformations
of the formwork shall be less than the specified tolerances.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Form Materials

Formwork shall be composed of steel, best quality shuttering wood and shuttering
plywood (minimum 19 mm thick waterproof), fiberglass-reinforced plastic or any other
material that will result in concrete with the required finish and within the specified
tolerance. Timber shall be free from knots and shall be of medium grain as far as
possible. Hard woods shall be used as caps and wedges under or over posts. Plywood
or equivalent shall be used where specified to obtain smooth surface for exposed
concrete work. Struts shall generally be mild steel tubes and strong Sal wood posts 150
mm or above in diameter.
Wood or other porous form material shall be treated or coated to prevent absorption of
water from the fresh concrete and to prevent discolouration or chemical deterioration of
the concrete surface. All form material shall be free of raised grains, torn surfaces, worn
edges, patches and other defects that would impair the appearance of the concrete
surface.
Bamboo, small diameter posts, etc. shall not be used unless specially approved by the
Engineer in specific cases. The use of aluminum form material in contact with concrete
shall not be allowed.
C S- 06 0 - 9 7
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S F O R MW O R K F O R R C C
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Construction
The centering for the formwork shall be true and rigid and thoroughly braced horizontally
and diagonally. The forms shall be sufficiently strong to carry, without undue
deformation, the dead weight of the concrete as a liquid and working load. Where the
concrete is vibrated, the formwork shall be strong enough to withstand the effects of
vibration without appreciable deflection, bulging or distortion and shall be sufficiently
tight to prevent any leakage of mortar. The formwork shall be such as to ensure the
concrete a smooth uniform surface free from honeycombs, air bubbles, fines and other
blemishes.
Any blemishes or defect found on the surface of the concrete must be brought to the
notice of the Engineer and immediately rectified free of charge as directed or approved
by the Engineer. Where there are chances of fixtures being embedded, only mild steel
or concrete of adequate strength shall be used.
Block outs and sleeves shall be provided for mechanical and electrical work wherever
necessary, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
Embedded items shall be secured prior to concrete placement. Templates shall be used
to set equipment anchor bolts and other items where final alignment is critical.
For exposed interior and exterior concrete surface of beams, columns and walls,
plywood or other approved forms, thoroughly cleaned and tied together with approved
corrosion-resident divides shall be used. Rigid care shall be exercised in ensuring that
all columns are plumb and true and thoroughly cross-braced to keep them so. All floor
and beam centering shall be crowned not less than 8 mm in all directions for every 5 m
span. Unless described in the Drawing or elsewhere to the contrary, beveled strips 25
mm x 25 mm shall be provided, without any extra charge, to form angles and in corners
of column and beam boxes for chamfering of corners.
Temporary openings for cleaning, inspection and for pouring concrete shall be provided
at the base of vertical forms and at other places, where they are necessary and are
directed by the Engineer. The temporary openings shall be so formed that they can be
conveniently concreted.
3.2 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

All rubbish, loose concrete chippings, shavings, saw dust, etc. shall be scrupulously
removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is poured. Wire brushes,
brooms, etc. compressed air jet and/or water jet shall be kept handy for the cleaning if
directed by the Engineer.
The form surface in contact with concrete shall be treated with approved non-staining
composites, such as approved brand form oil. The composites shall not come in contact
with reinforcing steel or existing concrete surface. They shall not be allowed to
accumulate at the bottom of the shuttering.
The formwork shall be so designed and erected that the forms for slabs and the sides of
the beams, columns and walls may be removed first, leaving the shuttering to the soffits
of beams and their support in position. If formwork for column is erected for the full
height of the columns, one side of the form shall be left open and built up in sections, as
placing of concrete proceeds. Wedges, spacer bolts, clamps, or other suitable means
shall be provided to allow accurate adjustment of the formwork and to allow it to be
removed gradually without jarring the concrete.
CS-06 0-98
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S FO R MW OR K F OR R CC
3.3 Maintenance of Formwork

Positive means of adjustment, such as wedges and jacks, shall be provided for shores,
struts and similar members. Adjustments shall be made before and during concrete
placement as needed to result in concrete meeting the specified tolerance.
3.4 Removal of Forms

The Contractor shall record on the Drawing or in some approved manner, the date on
which the concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which the
formwork is removed therefrom and have this record checked and countersigned by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe removal of the formwork, but
the Engineer may delay the time of removal if he considers it necessary. Any work
showing signs of damage through premature removal of formwork or loading shall be
entirely reconstructed without any extra cost of the owner.
Forms for various types of structural component shall not be removed before the
minimum periods specified below, which shall also be subjected to the approval of the
Engineer.
Structural Minimum period before striking surface (days)
element Ordinary Portland Cement Rapid Hardening Portland
Concrete Cement Concrete
Temperature (C) Temperature (C)
40 – 20 20 – 5 40 – 20 20 – 5
Columns, walls 1 2 1/2 2
Beam sides 2 4 1 3
Beam soffit 21 28 10 16
Slabs > 125 mm 7 14 4 7
Slab ≤ 125 mm 14 21 8 14
The forms shall not be removed until site cured test cubes develop 50% of the 28-day
strength. Before removing any formwork, the Contractor must notify the Engineer well in
advance to enable him to inspect the concrete if he so desires.
3.5 Reuse of Forms

Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, joints etc. examined and
when necessary repaired and inside surface treated as specified hereinbefore.
Formwork shall not be used/re-used, if declared unfit or unserviceable by the Engineer.
4.1 Measurement
Measurement of payment for formwork shall be made of the area, in square meters, of
the concrete surface formed to the neat lines as shown on the Drawings or as required
by the Engineer.
4.2 Payment
Payment for formwork shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of Quantities.
The unit rate shall include for all necessary materials and labours required to design,
supply, fabricate, erect and remove the formwork, stage scaffoldings and the cost of all
other necessary works connected therewith.
No separate payment shall be made for formwork required for construction and
contraction joint or required for construction over break. The cost of such formwork is
deemed to be included in the appropriate unit costs of other works.
C S- 06 0 - 9 9
BRICK MASONRY WORK
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the construction of brickwork in general and the erection of half
brick, full brick and thicker walls in superstructure in particular. It covers brickwork with
normal machine-made and chimney bricks and in tradition decorative bricks (dachi apa).
1.2 Standards
Bricks shall conform to the requirement of I.S. 1077: 1992 – Specification for Common
Burnt Clay Building Bricks.
1.3 Submittal
Representative samples of bricks to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer and his
approval taken before bulk purchase. The samples shall be kept with the Engineer for
future reference and comparison. All bricks supplied shall conform to these approved
samples in all respects.
All bricks shall have to be approved by the Engineer. Any bricks not up to the
specification must be removed from the site immediately at Contractor’s own cost.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Bricks
2.1.1 Types of Bricks

Usually, the following two types of bricks shall be used for brickwork:
a. Machine-made bricks: These bricks shall be machine made, produced from any
standard brick factory producing such bricks.
b. Chimney bricks: These bricks shall be the produce of any brick kiln or the best
available local bricks.
c. Dachi apa bricks: These bricks shall be the product of any brick kiln specializing in
traditional decorative bricks.
2.1.2 Quality
Machine-made and chimney bricks shall be of first class quality. They shall be uniform
deep red in color, thoroughly burnt, regular in shape and size and shall have sharp and
square edges and parallel faces to ensure uniformity in the thickness of the courses of
brickwork. They shall be sound, hard, homogeneous texture and emit a clear ringing
sound on being struck. Their water absorption shall be minimum.
Dachi apa bricks shall meet all of the requirements of machine-made and chimney
bricks. However, they shall conform to the shape, size, thickness and design specified
from the manufacturer’s catalogue.
Bricks shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or lumps of any kind. They shall be
free from salt that affect the mortar of the masonry. They shall not show any sign of
efflorescence, either dry or subsequent to soaking in water.
C S- 0 7 0 - 1 00
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S B R I C K MA S O N R Y W O R K S
2.1.3 Storage
Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They shall be stacked in regular layers even as they
are unloaded. Bricks selected for different types of work shall be stacked separately.
The supply of bricks shall be arranged such that at least two weeks’ requirement of
bricks is available at site at any time.
2.2 Cement
Cement used for masonry shall conform to IS: 8112-1989. It shall be stored above
ground level on perfectly dry platform in a watertight shed. It shall be stacked not more
than ten bags high. The bags shall be stocked in a manner to facilitate removal and use
in the order in which they are received. Partly set cement shall not be used.
2.3 Water
Water shall be clean drinking water, free from deleterious matters and shall be stored in
temporary reservoirs or tanks constructed of brickwork with cement plaster finish.
2.4 Fine Aggregate

Sand shall be natural occurring river bed sand or pit sand. It shall be clean and free
from dirt, clay or other impurities. Sand brought to the site shall be approved by the
Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation of Mortar

Mortar shall be as specified in the Drawing, Bills of Quantities or schedule of items for
the particular work. This may differ from case to case and as per the size, shape and
thickness of the wall.
Cement and sand (or any binding and supporting materials) shall be mixed dry
thoroughly on a clean approved platform or in a mechanical mixer, and water shall then
be added to the mix to obtain a mortar paste of stiff consistency, care being taken to
add just sufficient water for the purpose.
Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing, within 30 minutes after the
cement is mixed wet. Mortar unused for more than 30 minutes shall be rejected and
removed (mixes of lime putty and sand can be kept for a period of 72 hours, provided
they is kept damp and not allowed to dry).
The well-mixed mortar shall be transported from the mixing platform to the work site in
such a manner as to prevent formation of laitance or segregation.
3.2 Scaffolding
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided as directed by
the Engineer. The supports shall be sound and strong and of steel tubular construction
unless otherwise approved. The vertical posts shall be tied together with horizontal
pieces over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. The three sides of the
scaffolding shall be covered with l m wide ply boards to protect the materials from
dropping off while working.
3.3 Soaking Bricks

Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period that is sufficient for the water just
to penetrate their whole depth. Any dirt, sand and dust shall be removed from the
surface of the bricks. Bricks shall not be too wet at the time of use, as such bricks are
likely to slip in the mortar bed and can affect the plumbness of the wall. When bricks are
soaked, they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently early so that, at the time of
laying, they are skin dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean platform, free
from dirt, earth etc.
CS-070-1 01
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R C I V I L W O R K S B RI C K MAS ON R Y WO RK S
3.4 Bond
Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, English Bond shall be used in the
construction of full brick and thicker walls. For half brick thick walls and decorative
bricks, stretcher bond shall be used throughout.
Quoin bricks shall be laid header and stretcher in alternative courses, bond being
obtained by placing a closer next to the quoin header. The arrangements of quoin in a
course shall generally be symmetrical. Holes of required size shall be left in the
brickwork during laying for fixing pipes, service lines, passage of water etc. After the
pipes, service lines, etc. are fixed, the leftover space in the holes shall be filled with 1:3
cement mortar or 1:3:6 cement concrete, and the face neatly made up with bricks in
cement mortar. When iron fixtures etc. are to be laid in, the brickwork shall be entirely
covered with not less than 10 mm of 1:3 cement-sand mortar.
3.5 Laying of Bricks for Masonry

Bricks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar evenly applied on the wetted surface of the
old brickwork. Any dirt or earth is on the wall shall be cleaned by wire brush and washed
down with water jet. When laying, the bricks shall be slightly pressed so that the mortar
can get into all the pores of the brick surface to ensure proper adhesion. Cross joints
and wall joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no hollow
spaces are left. All brickwork shall be in plumb, square and true to dimensions as shown
in the Drawings.
All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural parts
around door and window frames, with proper distance to permit cancelled joints.
However, where specifically shown on the Drawings, a gap between the brickwork and
adjoining columns and overhead beams shall be provided to prevent the brickwork from
damage by column and beam movement during earthquakes. The gaps shall be filled
with the specified cement sand mortar, covered with a layer of chicken wire mesh nailed
to the brickwork and column and finally finished with plaster specified for other parts of
the walls.
3.6 Thickness of Joints

The thickness of the joints in the brickwork shall be 8 mm unless otherwise specified.
This thickness shall be uniform throughout the work. In case of traditional decorative
brickwork, the joint thicknesses may vary across the brick section according to the
shape of the brick, generally being zero at the outer face of the brickwork and increasing
towards the interior.
3.7 Raking-out Joints

Joints of brickwork shall be raked out to a depth of 6 mm at the time of laying. The face
of the brickwork shall be kept clear of all mortar the very day the brickwork is laid.
3.8 Reinforcing and Anchorage

For external walls, anchors in the form of flats or rods from beams and columns and any
other anchoring and reinforcement, as shown on Drawings, shall be adequately
embedded in the masonry.
For half-brick walls, two bars of 8mm diameter shall be used longitudinally at every fifth
course of the brickwork. The first reinforcement shall be placed on top of the
bottommost course. The bars shall be fully embedded in the mortar, and their ends shall
be properly bonded in the vertical joints of brickwork or to the main wall, as directed by
the Engineer Laps for the reinforcement shall be a minimum of 45 times the bar
diameter.
Where traditional decorative brick and half brick masonries are constructed side-by-side,
the two masonries will be constructed independently; however, an RCC strip shall be
provided at specified layers, shown on the Drawings, to connect the two masonries and
C S- 0 7 0 - 1 02
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S B R I C K MA S O N R Y W O R K S
thus form a composite wall. This strip shall cover the full width of the half brick wall and
part width of the decorative brick wall so that the outer appearance of the latter is not
affected.
3.9 Rise
During construction, no part of a half-brick thick wall shall rise more than 1 m above the
general construction level to avoid unequal settlement and improper jointing. Where the
masonry of one part has to be delayed, the work shall be racked back suitably at an
angle not exceeding 45 degrees according to bond and not toothed.
3.10 Architectural Features

All projecting architectural features, such as string courses, cornices etc., shall be
effectively bonded by tailing into the brickwork to ensure stability. Such architectural
features shall be set straight and true as shown in the Drawings with finished joints.
3.11 Curing and Protection

The brickwork shall be kept wet for 7 days counted from 24 hours after the course is
laid. At the end of a day’s work, the masonry construction shall be protected from
harmful effects of rain, sun and frost by suitable coverings such as tarpaulin. Care shall
be taken during construction that edges of jambs, sills, heads, etc. are not damaged.
4.1 Measurement
Measurement for payments shall be done either in running meter, square meter or cubic
meter as indicated in the Bill of Quantities. Deductions of all openings and any concrete
works in the brickwork shall be done to arrive at the net quantity. However, nothing extra
shall be paid for making such openings, etc. No deductions shall be done for holdfasts.
Unless specified otherwise, nothing extra shall be admissible for cutting of bricks to suit
the RCC structure, walls in any shape other than straight or any cutting necessary for
shaping the walls to the structural design requirements. Extra payment shall, however,
be permissible for providing quarter brick thick brickwork, brick on edge, brick in soldier
course, springs, etc. for exposed brickwork and for brickwork in arches. Cutting in
brickwork shall be admissible only for civil works.
4.2 Payment
Payment for full brick masonry shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of
Quantities. These unit rates shall include necessary materials, labours and tools for
proper execution of the work, all auxiliary works, double scaffolding, (special)
conveyance of materials, curing, etc. The rates shall be applicable for works at all level
and of all shapes.
CS-070-1 03
INTERLOCKING PAVING BLOCKS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers preparation of subgrade for interlocking pavement and
interlocking pavement.
1.2 Standards
The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following
standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented
herein:
Concrete paving block M30: IS: 15658 (2006).
1.3 Submittals

The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and
tests batches of manufactured blocks. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer
in writing within 15 days after the Commencement Date, the source or sources i.e.
the manufacturer and brand name of concrete block to be used. Once such
notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior
approval of the Engineer.
1.3.2 Procedures
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering base preparation,
laying and finishing of works.
1.3.3 Test Results / Catalogues

The tests to be conducted should be in conformance with the above code and
following tests should be conducted and results submitted to the engineer minimum
5 days before actual commencement of works:
a. The testing of concrete paving blocks should confirm minimum M30 compressive
strength and tensile splitting of 24 N/mm2.
b. The blocks to comply with abrasive resistance specifications. This means that blocks
are only allowed a maximum 3mm of “damage” due to friction, i.e. 15 units of
1000mm3 per 5000 mm2.
c. The blocks are allowed only minimal dimensional variances as per the above code:
Width ±2 mm
Length ±2 mm
Thickness ±3 mm
d. The visual quality of the blocks should be acceptable.
C S- 0 8 0 - 1 04
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI L W OR K S I NT E R L O C K I N G P A V I N G B L O C K S
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Sub-grade material

Gravel shall be used as sub-grade material for preparation of bedding for
interlocking pavement. The characteristics of the gravel shall be as instructed by the
Engineer.
2.2 Interlocking Block

Factory made precast paver block of M-30 or otherwise specified grade, meeting the
above specified test certification shall only be used.
2.3 Stone dust

Stone dust shall be approved before use by the Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Cleaning, cutting and filling

The formation for a width equal to that of the pavement shall be cut to the depth
below the proposed finish level or as thickness mentioned in bill of quantity, equal to
the thickness of the course of stone dust (due allowance being made for
consolidation) and dress off in level to the finished profile. Stone dust layer shall be
compacted by 1 ton roller or equivalent means or as per the instructions of the
Engineer.
3.2 Installation of interlocking blocks

After grade preparation, the Engineer shall approve the leveling and allow laying of
interlocking blocks, the voids at pavement edges shall be filled with concrete of
same grade and the joints shall be filled with stone dust.
3.3 Filling of gaps using stone dust

After concrete block laying the gaps should be filled stone dust and leveled, taking
care to pack all joints firmly and removing excess and cleaning.
4.1 Measurement
Measurement of interlocking paving blocks for payment will be made only to the neat
finishing lines, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size
shall be measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter
as required.
4.2 Payment
Payment for interlocking paving blocks shall be made at the unit rates per square
meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all
labours, materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels, including
survey works, levelling cross sections and profiles for proper drainage to
surface/runoff drains, procurement, laying of concrete paving block, filling with stone
dust and leveling including its storage, protection, etc. all complete.
CS-080-1 05
A L U MI N U M P AR T I T I O N S A N D D O O R S
ALUMINUM PARTITIONS AND DOORS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
The work of this section covers the furnishing and installing of aluminum partitions,
doors, windows, ventilators and all related necessary items.
1.2 Standards
Subject BIS No.
Specification for aluminum partition, door IS 1948
Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys bars, rod and sections IS 733
(For general engineering purposes)-Specification.
Dimension for screw threads for general purposes. IS 1362
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal doors, windows and IS 1081
ventilators.
1.3 Submittals

The Contractor to identify the manufacturer for aluminum doors, windows and
ventilators. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days after
the Commencement Date, the source or sources i.e. the manufacturer and brand name
of materials used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not
be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
1.3.2 Procedures
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering the fabrication,
installation, finishing and glazing works.
1.3.3 Sample
Before starting the work, the contractor shall submit all the shop drawings and get prior
approval from the Engineer.
2. MATERIAL
Material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminum partitions, doors, windows and

ventilators manufactured from extruded aluminum alloy sections of standard sizes and
designs complete with fittings, ready for being fixed into the building shall be as per IS
1948.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Frame Work

Shop drawings for each type of doors/windows/ventilators etc. shall be prepared by
using suitable sections based on architectural drawings, adequate to meet the
C S- 0 9 0 - 1 06
AL U MI N U M P A R T I T I O N S AN D D O O R S
requirement/ specifications and by taking into consideration varying profiles of aluminum

sections being extruded by approved manufacturers. The shop drawings shall show full
size sections of glazed doors, windows, ventilators etc. The shop drawings shall also
show the details of fittings and joints.
2.1.2 Fire rated doors and frames

Doors so indicated on the Drawings shall bear the Underwriters'’ Laboratories (UL)
label, or equal, for the type of door listed. Class “A” doors shall have a 3 hour rating and
1210C maximum heat transmission in 30 minutes. Class “B” doors shall have a 1.5 hour
rating and 1210C maximum heat transmission in 30 minutes. Frames for labeled doors
shall bear a label with rating equal to that of the door.
2.1.3 Aluminum frames

Aluminum sheets shall be of specified gauge fitted with panel pins as per drawings.
S ec ti o n s for door and window frames and panels shall be made out of anodized or
powder coated aluminum, as specified, and shall have the dimensions specified in the
Bill of Quantities or the drawings.
The frame size, profile, sections and fittings shall be as shown in the drawings. Samples
of the same shall be submitted for approval with joints ground smooth, fitted complete
with fittings and accessories. This sample may be ultimately used in the work. The
wo r k m a n shi p shall be of the best quality. The surface of the frames shall not be
scratched. Glass of specified type and thickness shall be fitted to the frames using
approved rubber liners.
2.1.4 Glass Panes

Glass panes shall weigh at least 7.5 kg/m2 and shall be free from flaws, specks or
bubbles. All panes shall have properly squared corners and straight edges.
2.1.5 Screws
Screws threads of machine screws used in the fabrication of aluminum doors, windows
and ventilators shall conform to IS 1362.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Frame Work

Actual measurement of openings left at site for different type of door/window etc. shall
be taken. The fabrication of the individual door/windows/ventilators etc. shall be done
as per the actual sizes of the opening left at site. The frames shall be truly rectangular
and flat with regular shape corners fabricated to true right angles. The frames shall be
fabricated out of section which have been cut to length, mitered and jointed
mechanically using appropriate machines. Mitered joints shall be corner crimped or
fixed with self tapping stainless steel screws using extruded aluminum cleats of
required length and profile. All aluminum work shall provide for replacing
damaged/broken glass panes without having to remove or damage any member of
exterior finishing material.
3.2 Fixing of Frames

The holes in concrete/masonry/wood/any other members for fixing anchor
bolts/fasteners/screws shall be drilled with an appropriate electric drill.
Windows/doors/ventilators etc. shall be placed in correct final position in the opening
and fixed to Sal wood backing using stainless steel screws of star headed, counter sunk
and matching size groove of required size at spacing not more than 250 mm c/c or dash
fastener. All joints shall be sealed with approved silicone sealants.
In the case of composite windows and doors, the different units are to be assembled
first. The assembled composite units shall be checked for line, level and plumb before
CS-090-1 07
A L U MI N U M P AR T I T I O N S A N D D O O R S
final fixing is done. Engineer in his sole discretion may allow the units to be assembled
in their final location if the situation so warrants.
Where aluminum comes into contact with stone masonry, brick work, concrete, plaster
or dissimilar metal, it shall be coated with an approved insulation lacquer, paint or plastic
tape to ensure that electrochemical corrosion is avoided. Insulation material shall be
trimmed off to a clean flush line on completion.
The contractor shall be responsible for the doors, windows etc. being set straight,
plumb, level and for their satisfactory operation after fixing is complete.
3.3 Fabrication
For fixing aluminum alloy hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frame and the hinges
inserted inside and may be riveted to the frame. The hinges shall normally be of the
projecting type 67 mm wide. The pins for hinges shall be of stainless steel of non-
magnetic type or aluminum alloy HR30. Irrespective of hinges being anodized or
not, the aluminum alloy pins shall be anodized to a minimum film thickness of
0.025 mm shall be sealed with oil, wax or lanolin.
The handle for shutters shall be of cast aluminum conforming to IS Designation A-5-M of
IS 617 and mounted on a handle plate welded or riveted to the opening frame in such a
way that it could be fixed before the shutter is glazed. The handle should have anodized
finish with minimum anodic film thickness of 0.015 mm.
The aluminum hinges for ventilators shall be either cast or fabricated out of extruded
sections and shall be riveted to the fixed rail after cutting a slot in it.
Cast of extruded aluminum alloy hinges for doors shall be of the same type as in the
windows but of larger size. The hinges shall normally be of the 50 mm projecting. A
suitable lock for the door operable either from inside or outside shall be provided.
3.4 Position of bolts, fixing screws and lugs

Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections in
the position. Moreover; any steel lugs coming in contact with aluminum should be either
galvanized or given one coat of bituminous paint.
3.5 Finish
Aluminum doors, windows and ventilators may be supplied in either matt, scratch-brush
or polished finish. They may, additionally, also be anodized, if so required by the
Engineer. If colour anodizing is to be done then only approved light-fast shades should
be used.
A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate,
shall be applied on aluminum doors, windows and ventilators by the supplier to protect
the surface from wet cement during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed
after installation is completed.
3.6 Glazing
Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frames. If required, glazing clips may be
provided as extra fittings. Four glazing clips may be provided per glass pane. In case of
doors, windows and ventilators without horizontal glazing bars the glazing clips shall be
spaced according to the slots in the vertical members, otherwise the spacing shall be 30
cm.
All glass shall be of the best quality, free from specks, bubbles, smokes, veins, air holes,
blister and other defects. The thickness of glass panes shall be uniform.
After installation is complete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the
doors and windows operate properly in accordance with the intent and meaning of the
C S- 0 9 0 - 1 08
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR CI VI LWO RK A L U MI N U M P AR T I T I O N S & D O O R S
Drawings and Specification and the manufacturer's specifications and

recommendations. All finished work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.1 Measurement
Measurement of aluminum doors and windows for payment will be made only as shown
in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The content shall be worked out in
square meter.
4.2 Payment
Payment for aluminum partitions and doors shall be made at the unit rates per square
meter in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours,
materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels.
CS-090-1 09
CS-100
TILING WORKS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers providing and laying ceramic tiles glazed/non glazed, telia tiles,
clay tiles, monolithic tiles, and stone faced tiles in base mortar in floor as well as in walls
or sloped roof in general.
1.2 Standards
Subject IS No.
Specification for 43 grade ordinary portland Cement IS 8112-1989
Specification for portland slag cement IS 455
Method of measurement of Building and Civil Engineering work IS 1200-(Part XI )
(Part 11) paving, floor finishes, dado and skirting
Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles IS 1237- Edition
Specification for bitumen felts for water proofing and damp- IS 1322
proofing
Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete IS 1443
flooring tiles
Specification for portland pozzolana cement (Part-I) fly ash based IS 1489 (Part-I)
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement (Part II) calcined IS 1489-(Part II)
clay based
Specification for sand stone (Slab & Tiles) IS 3622
Acid and/or alkali Resistant tiles. IS 4457
Specification for rapid hardening portland cement IS 8041
Specification for white portland cement IS 8042
Specification for hydrophobic portland cement IS 8043
Specification for sulphate resisting portland cement. IS 12330
Methods of Testing of ceramic tiles IS: 13630 (Part-
10 to 15)
Specification for ceramic tiles; definition, classification IS 13712
characteristic and marking
Specification for pressed ceramic tile IS 15622
1.3 Submittals

The Contractor to identify the required tile make and get samples of (Grade A) for
approval by the Engineer. Approved samples shall be kept in the custody of the
Engineer and the tile supplied and used on the work shall conform to samples. The
Contractor shall then notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days after the
Commencement Date, the source or sources i.e. the manufacturer and brand name of
the tile to be used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not
be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
PA G E | 1 10
CS-100
1.3.2 Procedures
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering base preparation,
laying and finishing of works.
1.3.3 Test Results

The test as specified in relevant IS code should be conducted and reports submitted to
the Engineer, minimum 7 days before commencement of works:
1.3.4 Sampling
In any consignment all the blocks/slabs/tiles of the same group, size and finish shall be
grouped together to constitute a lot. Sample shall be selected and tested separately for
each lot for determining its conformity or otherwise to the requirements of the
specification. The number of blocks/slabs/tiles to be selected for the samples shall
depend upon the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with the relevant IS code.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Pressed Ceramic Tiles

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They
shall be flat, and true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling
or other imperfections detracting from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as
per IS 13630. Classification and Characteristics of pressed ceramic tiles shall be as
per IS 13712.
The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal size. Table 1, 3, 5, and 7 of IS
15622 give the modular preferred sizes and table 2, 4, 6 and 8 give the most
common non- modular sizes. Thickness shall be specified by the manufacturer. It
includes the profiles on the visible face and on the rear side. Manufacturer/supplier
and party shall choose the work size of tiles in order to allow a nominal joint width upto
2 mm for unrectified floor tiles and upto 1 mm for rectified floor tiles. The joint in
case of spacer lug tile shall be as per spacer. The tiles shall conform to table 10 of IS
15622 with water absorption 3 to 6% (Group BII).
The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. Glaze shall be either glossy or matt as
specified. The underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area
in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be
preferably free from glaze. However, any glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on
only upto 50 per cent of the surface area of the edges.
The color, texture and sizes of ceramic tiles shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2.2 Vitrified Tiles

The tiles shall conform to Table 12 of IS 15622 (Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08
per cent Group BIa) and the joint thickness in flooring shall not be more than 1mm.
2.3 Stone Finish Ceramic Tiles

Shall conform to standards mentioned in Pressed Ceramic Tiles, the top finish of the tile
should be a replication of natural stone.
2.4 Clay Tiles Roofing (Zhinguti)

The Clay Tile for Roofing shall conform to IS 654: 1992 (reaffirmed 2002) and Clay ridge
and ceiling tile shall conform to IS 1464-1973. The tiles shall sampled and tested as per
this IS 8920 - 1978 and test results submitted to the Engineer minimum 7 days prior to
the commencement of works.
PAGE | 111
C S- 10 0
Sample of roof tiling shall be produced before engineer for approval and the contractor
shall procure only those tiles that clearly and definitely confirm with the approved
sample. The roof tiles shall be laid in polymer modified, rigid, cementitious tile adhesive
(Sika Tilofix or equivalent). Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and shall not exceed
6mm and all the joints are pointed with waterproof tile grout.
Laying shall start from one side in the slope as indicated in drawing or instruction. Under
no circumstances shall the contractor insert small stone chips underneath the slab to
raise its level to desired level. After the clay tiles are laid, the mortar in the joints shall be
raked to a depth of 12.5mm to 20mm. Joints flush pointed with waterproof tile grout.
Special care shall be taken to protect the floor from walking over it before it is
completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3 days.
2.5 Clay Tiles Flooring for Roof (Telia)

The Clay Tile (Telia) flooring for roof using 25 mm thick Telia tile shall conform to IS
1478 : 1969 and IS 2690 for burnt clay flat terracing tiles. The methods of sampling
should conform to IS 8920 – 1978 and reports should be submitted to the Engineer
minimum 7 days prior to the commencement of works.
Sample of Telia tile floor shall be produced before Engineer for approval and the
contractor shall procure only those tiles that clearly and definitely confirm with the
approved sample. At any case, the procured tiles shall be exhibited before using. The
tiles shall be laid on 1:2 lime surkhi bed. Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and
shall not exceed 6 mm and all the joints are pointed with 1:1 Cement sand mortar.
raise its level to desired level, the slope shall be adjusted in the bedding mortar. After
the tiles are laid, the mortar in the joints shall be raked to a depth of 12.5 mm to 20 mm.
Joints flush pointed with 1:1 cement sand mortar. Special care shall be taken to protect
the floor from walking over it before it is completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3
days.
2.6 FLAG STONE FLOORING

Floor stone shall be of uniform color free from cracks and other defects. Each of the four
edges shall be trimmed to four straight lines with right angle to other edge. The size of
the flagstone shall be of uniform in width of 45 cm and the variable length not less than
30 cm. Thickness of the slab shall not exceed more than 50 mm nor be less than 30
mm.
Sample of floor stone shall be produced before site In-charge for approval and the
contractor shall procure only those stone slabs that clearly and definitely confirm with
the approved sample. At any case, the procured slabs shall be exhibited before using as
floor slab. Stone slab shall be laid on 1:4 cement sand bed. Joints shall be kept as thin
as possible and shall not exceed 6mm and all the joints are pointed with 1:1 Cement
sand mortar.
raise its level to desired level. After the slabs of stone are laid, the mortar in the joints
shall be raked to a depth of 12.5mm to 20mm. Joints flush pointed with 1:1 cement sand
mortar. Special care shall be taken to protect the floor from walking over it before it is
completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3 days.
2.7 Mortar
Mortar shall be 1 part of cement and 3 parts of sand or as specified in the Bill of
Quantities. Materials and preparation of mortar shall conform to the plaster work.
PA G E | 1 12
C S - 10 0
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Installing the Tile

Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned,
wetted and mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:2 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand) or as specified. The average thickness of the bedding shall
be 20 mm or as specified while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not
be less than 10 mm.
Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden
sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the
mason to place wooden plank across and squat on it.
Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be
spread at the rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area up to one
square meter. Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this
grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin
as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.
The joints in the tile work shall be accurately aligned with horizontal joints level and
vertical joints plumb. Joints shall be maintained uniformly 1/16" wide or as directed
aligning spacer lugs on tile edges if tiles are so manufactured or by use of wetted
strings. Tiles shall be laid out in such a way that no tile less than half size occurs. Where
tile must be cut at edges or penetrated the cut edges shall be carefully filed and neatly
ground. Chipped, cracked or broken tile shall not be used and all defective work shall be
replaced and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight
edge about 2 m long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath,
toilet W.C. kitchen and balcony/verandah flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in
drawing will be given in addition to required slope to avoid spread of water. Further
tile drop will also be provided near floor trap.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size,
and their edge rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed
in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting
or dado. After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.
3.2 Pointing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel
to a depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then
be flush pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the
colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are provided, the half the depth of joint shall
be filled with polysulphide or as specified on top with under filling with cement grout
without the lugs remaining exposed. During grouting all excess grout shall be cleaned
off the tile surface with damp cloth or sponge. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7
days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor
shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
All tile work finishing shall be adequately protected from damage during the progress of
construction till completion and any damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Upon completion prior to final inspection of
acceptance, the Contractor shall clean all tile work. Acids or other agents liable to
damage the work shall be avoided. If tile surface show mass scratches, cracks or other
imperfections which cannot be removed by cleaning; the Contractor shall remove the
defective materials and replace with new material at no additional expense.
PAGE | 113
C S- 10 0
3.3 Finishing
The finally laid tile shall be given epoxy grout or a coat of white cement slurry as per the
instruction of the Engineer to fill up the joints, which shall wiped off from the tiles.
4.1 Measurement
The measurement for payment shall be done in square meter and running meter as
described in the item for respective thickness.
4.2 Payment
Payment for vitrified monolithic tile flooring shall be made at the unit rates per square
meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours,
materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing
and hauling cement, tiles their storage, protection, etc. all complete.
PA G E | 1 14
C S - 10 0
PLASTER WORK
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers 12.5mm, 15mm or 20 mm plaster on different surfaces like
cement or masonry.
2. STANDARDS
Subject BIS No.
IS Code of practice for application of cement and cement- IS 1661 -1972
lime plaster finishes
Specifications for sand for plaster IS 1542
Specification for coarse and fine aggregates for natural sources for IS 383
concrete
Specification for 43 grade OPC IS 8112-1989
Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works : IS 1200

Part : XII — Plastering and Pointing
This specification covers cement plaster or lime plaster finishes to walls, columns
ceilings and similar surfaces on background normally wet with, such as brick, or
concrete (plain or reinforced).
2.1 Sample to be Approved

Samples of about 1 sq. m. of plaster of all types of plaster work shall be prepared for the
approval of the Engineer prior to further execution.
When only one coat of plaster is specified, the base shall be prepared as specified for
undercoat and one coat of plaster shall be directly apply as finish coat.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Cement
The cement shall be ordinary Portland cement of approved brand and manufacture and
shall comply in all respects with the I.S. 8112-1989 for ordinary Portland cement. It shall
be delivered on the site in packages with an unbroken seal fixed by the makers and
plainly marked with the name of brand and the manufacturer. It shall be stored in a dry
place in regular piles not exceeding ten bags high kept over wooden timber and planks
with sufficient walking space in such a manner that it will be efficiently protected from
moisture and contamination and that the consignments can be used up in the order in
which they are received. Set cement shall be immediately removed from the work and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
If desired, tests shall be made by taking samples of cement from stores or elsewhere
from the works. The selection of samples and procedure for testing shall comply with the
appropriate Indian Standard.
PAGE | 115
C S- 10 0
3.2 Water
Water for construction work shall not be salty or blackish and shall be clean drinking
water, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and traces of oils,
acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other deleterious material which will
weaken the concrete. Water shall be obtained from the sources approved by the
Engineer. Sources of water shall be maintained at such a depth and the water shall be
withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
Containers for transport, storage and handling of water shall be clean.
3.3 Sand
Sand shall consist of silicious material having hard, strong, durable, uncoated particles,
free from undesirable amounts of dust, lumbs, soft, or flaky particles or other deleterious
substances. The amount of different undesirable substances shall not exceed the
percentage limits by weight as specified in relevant I.S. Codes but in no case, the total
amount of all undesirable substances shall exceed five percent by weight. All fine
aggregate (sand) shall conform to I.S. 383-1970 and IS 1542-1992.
3.4 Lime
The lime shall comply with I.S. 712:1956. All impurities, ashes, or pieces improperly
burnt shall be screened or picked out before slaking. The lime shall be slaked with water
not less than one week or more than two weeks before use. The slaked lime shall be
screened through I.S. 240 sieve for first coat and I.S. 120 sieve for second and third
coat of plaster.
The slaked lime shall be stored in a weather proof and damp proof closed shed with
impervious storey and sides to protect it against rain, moisture, weather and extraneous
materials mixing with it. The lime shall be used when fresh, i.e. within 14 days of its
removal from kiln.
All lime that has been damaged by rain, moisture, dirt, air slaking or any other cause
shall be rejected and all rejected material shall be removed from the site forthwith.
Sample of lime shall be approved by the Engineer who shall keep it in his site office for
reference. Field test of lime shall be in accordance with IS 1624-1960.
3.5 Additives for Waterproofing

For waterproof plaster the following additives to be added to the mortar mix:
 Shrinkage compensating expanding grout additive (Sunplex/Excem C) : 0.66% by
weight of cement (330 gm per bag of cement)
 Acrylic modifier (Armourcrete) : 2% by weight of cement (1 Kg per bag of cement)
 Multi-dimensional Monofilament Polypropylene Fibres (Stealth Fairfibre) : 0.15-
0.25% by weight of cement (75-125 gm per bag of cement) optional.
3.6 Mortars
3.6.1 Cement Mortar

The mortar for cement plaster shall be as specified in the Drawing, Bills of quantities or
schedule of items for the particular work.
Cement and sand (or any binding and supporting materials) shall be mixed dry
thoroughly on clean approved platform or in a mechanical mixer and water shall then be
added to obtain a mortar of the consistency of a stiff paste. Care being taken to add just
sufficient water for the purpose.
Mortar shall be used as soon as possible, after mixing and within 1/2 hours after cement
is mixed wet. Mortar unused for more than 1/2 hours shall be rejected and removed
PA G E | 1 16
C S - 10 0
(mixes of lime putty and sand can be kept for a period of 72 hours, provided it is kept
damp and not allowed to dry).
The well mixed mortar shall be transported from the mixing platform to the site of work in
such a manner as to prevent formation of laitance or segregation.
3.7 Tools and Accessories

All tools shall be cleaned by scraping and working at the end of each day's work, or after
use with different materials. Metal tools shall be cleaned and greased after each
operation. All tools shall be examined and thoroughly cleaned before plastering begins.
3.8 Scaffolding
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided as directed by
the Engineer. The supports shall be sound and strong and of steel tubular, wooden
ballies, planks, trestles, G. I. Pipes, ply board and other scaffolding material. The vertical
posts shall be tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks be
fixed. The three sides of the scaffolding should be covered with l.0 m wide plyboards to
protect the materials from dropping off while working.
4. EXECUTION
4.1 Preliminary Work

All materials for plastering shall be kept readily available at the site. Plastering operation
shall not be started until and necessary fixings such as doors, windows, and fittings of
light, sanitary plumbing and other services etc. are completed and all pipe and conduits
to be embedded in the wall or plaster are installed
A preliminary inspection shall be made to ensure that the surfaces are in a suitable
condition for plastering, particularly as regards their planeness and dryness. If dubbing
out is necessary, it should be done in advance, so that an adequate time interval may
be permitted before the application of the first under coat.
Plastering is done by applying cement mortar in the ratio specified in BOQ items (1:3
and 1:4) on the surfaces and the plaster should be in straight line, level and plumb and
the joint must be in right angle.
4.2 Sequence of Operations

For external plaster, the plastering operation shall be started from the top storey and
carried downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operation shall be started
wherever the building frame and placing work are ready and the temporary supports of
the ceiling resting on the wall or the storey have been removed.
4.3 Surface Preparation

The surfaces to be plastered shall first be prepared as follows:
4.3.1 Cleanliness
The loose layer of dust on masonry shall be brushed away before the plaster is applied.
A stiff bristle brush or wire brush may be used or, to be more effective, brushing may be
combined with blowing of compressed air. Laitance on a freshly cast concrete surface
shall be removed, The contaminated layer formed on concrete surface due to formation
of soap by the reaction of resins with calcium hydrate or due to moils oils shall be
removed by brush.
Special care shall be taken in repairing for re-rendering an old plaster coat. Old layers of
the plaster coats shall be completely removed and made good. Crumbled and frost-
damaged parts shall be cut out and patched. Any trace of algae or moss formation shall
be removed. If the background contains soluble salts, particularly sulphates, the
PAGE | 117
C S- 10 0
application of plaster shall be done only after the efflorescence of the salt is complete,
and efflorescence is thoroughly removed from the surface.
4.3.2 Roughness
The roughness of the background may generally improve the bond of the plaster. A
smooth surface may be roughened by wire brushing if it is not hard, or by hacking or
bush-hammering if it is hard. Alternatively, to obtain a rough surface, a mortar may be
forcibly dashed on to the surface (spatter dash treatment) by suitable means on to a
hard surface like concrete. On a soft smooth surface, a thin coat of cement slurry 1:1
(cement and sand) may be applied for the purpose. After roughening the surface, care
shall be taken to moisten the surface sufficiently before plastering, as otherwise the
freshly exposed surface may tend to absorb considerable amount of water from the
plaster. In addition to general roughness in the masonry, the joints shall also be raked to
a depth of about 3 mm for providing key to plaster.
4.3.3 Surface Damping

The surface shall not be soaked but shall only be damped 24 hours before applying
plaster. If the surface becomes dry in a spot, such areas shall be moistened again to
restore uniform suction. A fog-spray shall be used for this purpose.
4.3.4 Evenness
The background shall be even in order to avoid variations in the thickness of plaster.
Any unevenness must be levelled before the plaster is applied. Local projections in
brickwork shall be removed. For coat thick plaster work, the local projection shall not
exceed 12 mm of the general surface as determined by the periphery of the surface
concerned, and local depression shall not exceed 19 mm. For two coats of plaster, a
local projection shall not exceed 12 mm and local depression 12 mm.
4.4 Application of Undercoat

The undercoat shall be approximately 12 mm thick and carried to the full length of the
wall or to the natural breaking points like doors, or windows. Before the undercoat
hardens, it shall be deeply worked to provide mechanical key for the finishing coat.
Masonry walls on which plaster is to be applied directly, shall be clean and dry with the
joints raked to a depth of at least 10 mm. Before applying the undercoat, the surface
shall be damped evenly to control suction. The undercoat shall be trowelled hard and
tight, forcing it into surface depressing to obtain a permanent bond.
On monolithic walls, the undercoat shall be dashed on unless the surface is sufficiently
rough to ensure adequate bond for it when applied with a trowel. Rough surfaces that
permit successful application with the trowel are produced by mechanical roughening.
The dashing of the undercoat shall be done using a strong whipping motion at right
angles to the face of the wall, or it may be applied with a plaster machine or cement
gum.
The undercoat shall be kept damp for at least two days immediately following its
application. It shall then be allowed to become thoroughly dry.
On metal reinforcements, the plaster shall completely embed the metal. This may easily
be accomplished with the large mesh type of reinforcement, the openings of which are
large enough to permit plaster readily to pass through them.
4.5 Application of Finishing Coat

Before starting to apply the finishing coat, the second coat shall be damped evenly.
Whenever possible, plaster shall be applied from top to bottom in one operation to
eliminate joining marks. The finishing coat shall be applied with a trowel to a thickness
or approximately 12mm and roughly leveled off.
PA G E | 1 18
C S - 10 0
When the surface has begun to harden, it shall be leveled off with a straight grained
wood float. At a later period during drying out, when the face is quite stiff and there is no
moisture on the surface, the float shall be worked with a circular movement bringing the
sand in the plaster to the face and producing a uniform texture.
Alternatively, the facing shall be tapped gently with a wood float after the setting has
commenced but before the plaster is dry, and care shall be taken that the tapping is
even, uniform and is not overdone. As a final operation, to remove any float marks
which may be left on the surface, a damp rubber sponge shall be applied with a circular
motion on the face.
4.6 Cleaning and Curing

Care should be taken that unwanted cement mortar on the frames and electric fittings
should be cleaned immediately after finishing the plaster.
Proper curing should be done at least for 7 days after the plastering is complete as it is
the most important factor for maintaining the strength of plaster.
4.7 Moulding
All moulding shall be worked true to template and drawn neat, clean and level. All
exposed angles and junctions with door frames etc. shall be carefully finished.
4.8 Cement Plaster with Neat Cement Finish in Dado

Whenever it is required, there shall be 3 mm thick film of neat cement finish of 1:1 mix or
specified proportion. The neat cement finish, if required, shall be mixed with 3-12% of
colour crete of specified colour and brand or as directed by the Engineer. The neat
cement finish shall be applied after completely setting the final layer of cement plaster.
The neat finishing layer or film shall be trowelled smooth.
4.9 Decorative Plaster

The decorative plaster of specified proportion shall be applied as specified in BOQ item.
The design and workmanship quality shall be the same as that of existing finished
decorative surface.
5.1 Measurement
Measurement of plaster and putty punning for payment will be made only to the neat
lines as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be
measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter as required.
5.2 Payment
Payment for ordinary plaster shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted for
item in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials
and equipment required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing and hauling
material, its storage, protection, etc. all complete
PAGE | 119
LANDSCAPING
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the land development and landscaping internally and externally
which includes supply of soil, cutting, refilling depressions and hollows, cutting of trees,
removal of roots, plantation of trees, laying of turfs, civil works as per drawing or
instruction of Engineer.
1.2 Standards
Subject BIS No.
Stacking and storage of Construction Materials and Components IS 4082
at site-Recommendations.
Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources IS 383
for concrete.
Code of practice for preparation and use of Masonry mortar. IS 2250
Code of practice for brick work. IS 2212
Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones. IS 1129
Polished Building Stones (Part-1) Granite IS 14223 (Part 1)
1.3 Submittals

The Contractor shall identify the location for good quality of soil and turf. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer well in time with the sample of soil and turf being used before
the commencement of work. Once the approval of the samples the source of material
shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
1.3.2 Procedures
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering dressing, trenching,
uprooting weeds, supply, staking and spreading of sludge, turfing, plantation, and care
of works.
1.3.3 Test Results

The tests for soil, cement, sand, aggregate, brick shall be conducted as per the
Earthwork, Mortar works, Concrete works and Brick works specifications respectively
and reports shall be submitted to the Engineer before commencement of work.
1.3.4 Sample
Before starting the work, the contractor shall get samples of turfs and soil approved
by the Engineer.
2. MATERIAL
2.1 Materials
Turf, top soil, water, cement, bricks, aggregate and other civil work materials.
2.1.1 Turfs
Turfs shall be interpreted as grass that is seasonally dormant during the cold or dry
seasons and is capable of renewing growth after the dormant period. The turfs shall be
brought by the Contractor from areas where the topsoil is reasonably fertile and contains
PA G E | 1 20
a high percentage of loamy topsoil. Turfs shall be cut or stripped from living, thickly
matted turf relatively free of weeds or other undesirable foreign plants, large stones,
roots or other materials which might be detrimental to the development of the turf or to
future maintenance. Turf including the soil containing the roots shall be planted in a neat
and systematic way. The strips of the turf shall be in uniform widths not less than 225
mm and length not more than 450 mm, but such lengths should be readily lifted without
breaking, tearing or loss of soil.
2.1.2 Top Soil

The top soil on which turfing is to be done shall be free of admixture of sub-soil, stone,
gravel, clay lumps, plants or their roots, sticks or other extraneous materials exceeding
50 mm diameter. It shall be clay loam. The top soil shall be approved by the Engineer
before being placed.
2.1.3 Civil Work Materials

Civil materials such as cement, sand, aggregates, bricks shall be of approved quality as
mentioned in respective chapters or as mentioned in drawing or as per instructions of
Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Rough Dressing of the Trenched Ground

The trenched ground shall be levelled and rough dressed and if there are any
hollows and depressions resulting from subsidence which cannot be so levelled,
these shall be filled properly with earth brought from outside to bring the
depressed surface to the level of the adjoining land and to remove discontinuity of
slope and then rough dressed again.
3.2 Spreading good Earth

Good earth shall be removed from stacks by head load and spread evenly over the
surface to the thickness ordered by the Engineer. It shall be spread with a twisting
motion to avoid segregation and to ensure that spreading is uniform over the entire
area.
Manure shall be added and given sufficient time so that soil gets mixed with the manure.
If any civil structure shall be constructed, the work shall be completed before the soil
work or as instructed by the Engineer.
3.3 Turfing and Plantation

The turfs shall be transplanted within 24 hours from the time it is stripped unless storing
is a necessity. If stored, turfs shall be staked, kept moist and protected from exposure to
the air and sun. Turfs shall be cut and moved only when the soil mixture conditions are
such that favorable results can be expected. Turfing shall be performed only during the
seasons when satisfactory results can be expected. Turfing may be transplanted during
periods of drought with the approval of the Engineer, provided the turf bed is watered to
moisten the soil to a depth of at least 100 mm immediately prior to laying the turf.
The turf shall be carefully placed by hand, edge to edge with staggered joints, in rows at
right angle to the slopes, commencing at the base of the area to be turfed and working
upward. The turf shall immediately be pressed firmly into contact with the turf bed by
tamping to provide a true and even surface. Screened soil of good quality shall be used
to fill all cracks between turfs. The quality of fill solid shall not cause smothering of the
grass.
Plantation shall be done as per instruction of Engineer.
PAGE | 121
3.4 Care of Works
The Contractor shall provide general care for the turfed area, protect against traffic and
shall continue until final inspection and acceptance of the work. If the surface becomes
gullied or otherwise damaged during the period, the affected area shall be repaved to
reestablish the grade and condition as directed.
4.1 Measurement
Measurement of landscaping for payment will be made only to the works, as shown in
the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up
to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter on the ground surface covered
by landscaping work.
4.2 Payment
Payment for landscaping shall be made at the unit rates square metre quoted in the Bill
of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and
equipments all complete as per drawing and instruction of the Engineer.
PA G E | 1 22
BARBED WIRE FENCE WORK
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the internal boundary demarcation fencing works of barbed wire
supported of MS angle post as per drawing or instruction of Engineer.
1.2 Standards
Subject BIS No.
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building IS 806
construction.
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general IS 816
construction in mild steel.
Code of procedures for inspection of welds. IS 822
Manual for metal arc welding in mild steel. IS 823
Methods for sampling of steel pipes, tube and fittings. IS 4711
Dimensions for clearance holes for bolts and screws. IS 1821
1.3 Submittals

The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and tests.
The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer the source of material being used. Once
such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior
approval of the Engineer.
1.3.2 Test and Inspection

The erected fencing shall deform any post and wires shall be straight without
sagging.
1.4 Materials
MS angle, barberd wire, water, cement, sand, aggregate and other civil work materials.
1.4.1 Barbed Wire

The barbed wire fences shall be two-strand galvanized barbed wire (Minimum of
100gm/m2) over the Mild steel wires of required diameter should be used for fencing.
Mild Steel should conform BS 15 or equivalent. The MS post shall conform to the design
drawings.
Civil materials such as cement, sand, aggregates, bricks shall be of approved quality as
mentioned in respective chapters or as mentioned in drawing or as per instructions of
Engineer.
PAGE | 123
2. EXECUTION
2.1 The MS angle posts are erected over the foundation of concrete bed as per the
drawing. The barbed wire is tightened to the post in the hooks. A tension not
exceeding 400kg/m2 is applied while erecting the wires in layers as per the design.
At the end diagonal bracing shall be made.
3.1 Measurement
The above work shall be measured in Sq. m. in the vertical plan above the foundation
completed as specified.
3.2 Payment
Payment for this work shall be made at the unit rates in square metre quoted in the
Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and
PA G E | 1 24
CHAIN LINK FENCE WORK
4. GENERAL
4.1 Scope
This section covers the boundary fencing works of chain link fence supported of MS
tubular posts as per drawing or instruction of Engineer.
4.2 Standards
The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards,
or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein:
Subject BIS No.
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building IS 806
construction.
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general IS 816
construction in mild steel.
Code of procedures for inspection of welds. IS 822
Manual for metal arc welding in mild steel. IS 823
Methods for sampling of steel pipes, tube and fittings. IS 4711
Dimensions for clearance holes for bolts and screws. IS 1821
4.3 Submittals

The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and
tests. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer the source of material being
used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be
changed without prior approval of the Engineer.
4.3.2 Test and Inspection

The erected fencing shall not deform any post and wires shall be straight without
sagging.
4.4 Materials
MS angle, barberd wire, water, cement, sand, aggregate and other civil work
materials.
4.4.1 Chain Link Mesh

The chain link fences shall be GI wire mesh of 50 x 50 mm size and 4mm dia of wires
supported on MS angle frames of specified section welded to 50mm dia tubular steel
pipes of 3.2mm thickness. Mild Steel should conform BS 15 or equivalent. The
fencing shall be as of the designed drawings.
Civil materials such as cement, sand, aggregates, bricks shall be of approved quality
as mentioned in respective chapters or as mentioned in drawing or as per
instructions of Engineer.
PA G E | 1 25
5. EXECUTION
5.1 The MS tubular posts are erected over the foundation of concrete bed as per the
drawing. The MS angle frames as of the sections specified shall be welded to the
vertical posts as per the drawings and instruction by the UNOPS Engineer.
All the MS members shall be painted with minimum of one coat of re-oxide primer
and two coats of enamel paint of approved color as per the instruction of the UNOPS
Engineer.
6.1 Measurement
The above work of fencing shall be measured in Sq. m. in the vertical plan above the
foundation completed as specified.
6.2 Payment
Payment for this work shall be made at the unit rates in square metre quoted in the
Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and
PA G E | 1 26
GYPSUM BOARD FALSE CEILING
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the false ceiling works of gypsum board for the
meeting/auditorium room of the main building as per the instruction of UNOPS
Engineer.
1.2 Materials
9.5 mm-12mm thick (or as specified) Gypsum board tiles of 610 x 610 mm size ( or as
per design) conforming to IS 2095: 1982 & 2542-1981. The tiles shall be plain,
textured or designed with design patterns as per drawings or approved by the
UNOPS Engineer.
The suspenders are galvanized mild steel straps of 28G and horizontal and
transverse members are galvanized mild steel channel of 16 G.
1.3 Execution
1.3.1 Frame Work

The frame work shall be of zinc coated mild steel or galvanized iron (G.I. framing)
and shall consist of 45 mm sq. or 50 x50 mm square tubes of 18G as main runners
as specified in the item at specified spacing welded together with 45 mm x 45 mm
zinc coated Gypsteel branded channels, or 50 x 50 mm G.I. channels of 18G as
runners at specified spacing. The above frame shall be suspended from existing RCC
slab with adjustable 25 x 4 mm mild steel flats welded at top to reinforcement bars,
including exposing the reinforcement bars and making good the damages with
cement mortar as specified or instructed by the UNOPS Engineer.
1.3.2 Expanded Metal

Expanded metal shall be fixed with the long way of the mesh across the supports.
The strands in the various sheets shall all slope in one direction, in vertical work they
shall also slope inwards and downwards from the plaster face. To ensure continuity of
key at the fixing points small round rods, V- shaped ribs or strips of hardwood shall
be fixed on the face of the supports. All sheets shall be lapped not less than 25- mm
at the sides and ends, overlaps shall not occur only at supports. Sides of the sheets
shall be wired together with galvanized wire of not less than 18 SWG, at every 75
mm between supports. Cut ends of wire used for fastening etc. shall be bent inwards
and not towards the plaster finishing coat. The expanded metal shall be secured to
supports by means of galvanized staples at intervals of not more that100-mm. It shall
be secured to steelwork by wire or clips. The fixing centres should normally be not
greater than 350 mm for mesh weighing 1.2 kg/sq.m. of 10 or 6 mm mesh. Care shall
be taken to ensure that the anti corrosion treatment is in good condition after fixing.
1.3.3 Gypboard or Boral plaster board

The material for installing false ceiling system shall be made of gypsum board with
ISO 9002 and ISO 14000 certification, with minimum thickness of 12.5mm (maximum
variation in thickness +0.4mm or –0.4mm), with minimum density of 677 kg/cum, with
flexural strength not less than 485 N cross directional and 175 N machine directional,
with hardness at core, end and edge not less than 65 N, with capacity to withstand
breaking load not less than 556 N in longitudinal direction and not less than 275 N in
transverse direction. The thermal resistance value "R" shall be not less than 0.45,
with fire propagation index "I" not less than 2.1. It shall be fixed to the underside of
PA G E | 1 27
the suspended grid comprising properly galvanized 0.5mm thick 80mm x 26mm
ceiling section to be placed at maximum distance 457mm c/c, 0.5mm thick 20mm x
45mm x 30mm channel along the wall, 0.9mm thick 15mm x 45mm intermediate
channel to be placed at maximum distance of 122mm c/c, 0.5mm thick 25mm x
25mm ceiling angle to be placed at maximum distance connecting clip and 22mm x
37mm softie cleat to be fixed at RCC ceiling by using standard screw and proper
metal grip, as per drawing, manufacturers' specification, and instruction of Engineer,
all complete.
1.4 Finish
The ceiling boards free of damages are fixed to the framing in perfect line and level.
The joints are sealed with plaster of Paris and non-woven paper tapes without
forming any bubble the joints shall be finished flush to make the ceiling in one piece.
The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and curved as required.
Once laying of ceiling is completed the dust and floors are cleaned for the painting
works.
1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.5.1 Measurement
It shall be measured flat in square meter of the actual area covered.
1.5.2 Payment
Payment for work will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the
BOQ. The payment will be full and final compensation for all material, labours, and
equipment to complete the works as specified.
PA G E | 1 28
D - SPECIFICATIONS FOR SANITARY
WORKS & ELECTRICAL WORKS
Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SANITARY WORKS

Section SS-010: General -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 1-134
Section SS-020: Excavation Work-------------------------------------------------------------------Page 135-137
Section SS-030: Sanitary and Sewer Pipes------------------------------------------------------Page 138-`140
Section SS-040: Soil, Waste, Vent and Rain Water Piping----------------------------------Page 141-143
Section SS-050: Waste Pipes from Appliances------------------------------------------------ Page 144

Section SS-060: Water Supply------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 145-148
Section SS-070: External Water Supply----------------------------------------------------------Page 149

Section SS-080: Internal Water Supply-----------------------------------------------------------Page 150
Section SS-090: Pipe Support and Hangers----------------------------------------------------Page 151-152
Section SS-100: Measurement ----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 153

Section SS-110: Pipe Insulation-------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 154
Section SS-120: Bathroom Fixtures and Fittings---------------------------------------------Page 155-156
Section SS-130: Testing-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 157

Section SS-140: Miscellaneous Work------------------------------------------------------------Page 158-160
Sanitary Schedules-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 161-167
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRIC WORKS

Section ES-010: General Specifications -------------------------------------------------------Page 168-170
Section ES-020: Technical Specifications-----------------------------------------------------Page 171-176
Section ES-030: Distribution Board--------------------------------------------------------------Page 177
Section ES-040: Wiring and Accessories------------------------------------------------------Page 178-179
Section ES-050: Lighting Fixtures and Lamps-----------------------------------------------Page 180
Section ES-060: Earthing----------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 181
Section ES-070: Steel Tubular Poles------------------------------------------------------------Page 182
Section ES-80: Method of Measurement-------------------------------------------------------Page 183
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S SE C T I O N SS - 0 10
GENERAL
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
2. GENERAL
Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, all the applicable codes and standards
published by the International / National / Indian Standards and its subsequent
revision and all other standards, which may be published by them before construction
work starts, shall govern in respect of design, workmanship, quality and properties or
materials and method of testing. (All materials shall confirm and bear stamps of the
required Standard, specification or equivalent.)
Some of these available standards are listed below:
IS: 778 Specifications for Gun Metal Gate, Globe & Check Valves and for Water,
Steam and Oil only.
IS: 779 Specifications for Flow Meter for Water only.
IS: 781 Specifications for Cast Copper Alloy Screw Down Bib Taps and Stop Valves
for Water Services.
IS: 781E Specification for Sand Cast Brass Screw Down Bib Taps and Stop
Taps for Water Services.
IS: 1172 Basic Requirements of Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation.
IS: 1239 / NS: 199 Specifications for Galvanized Mild Steel Tubes, Tubular and
Other Galvanized Wrought Steel Fittings.
IS: 1879 Specification for GI Pipe Fittings.
IS: 544 Specification for threads of GI Pipe Fittings (parallel female and taper male
threads).
IS: 1703 Specification for Ball Valve (horizontal plunger type) including float for
water supply purpose.
IS: 1726 Specification for Cast Iron Manhole Covers & Frames.
IS: 1742 Code of Practice for Building Drainage.
IS: 2064 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of
Sanitary Appliances.
IS: 2056 Code of Practice for Water Supply in Building.
IS: 5329 Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipe Work Above Ground for Building.
IS: 2556 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances (Vitreous China).
NS: 40 Specifications for High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe.
NS: 68 / IS: 4985 Specifications for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (uPVC) Pipe.
IS: 5382 Specifications for Rubber Rings of Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (uPVC)
Pipe.
PA G E | 1 29
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S GEN E R AL
BS: 4514 / DIN: 1953 Specifications for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (uPVC) Pipe
Fittings.
DIN: 8078 General Quality Requirements and Testing of Poly Propylene Random
Copolymer (PP-R) Pipes.
DIN: 8077 Dimensions of Poly Propylene Random Copolymer (PP-R) Pipes.
DIN: 6962 Pipe Joints and Components for Poly Propylene Random Copolymer
(PP-R) Pressure Pipes.
DIN: 16928 Connections and Components Layout for Poly Propylene Random
Copolymer Pipe.
ASTM: D 1784 Specification for PVC Materials for PVC Schedule 40 Pipe and
Pipe Fittings
ASTM: D 1785 Specification for Dimensions for PVC Schedule 40 Plain End
Pipe
ASTM: D 2466 Specification for Dimensions for PVC Schedule 40 Pipe
Fittings
ASTM: D 2564 Specification for Solvent Cement for PVC Schedule 40 Pipe
and Pipe Fittings
ASTM: D 2846 Specification for Dimensions for C-PVC Schedule 40 Pipe and
Pipe Fittings
ASTM: 493 Specification for Solvent Cement for C-PVC Schedule 40 Pipe
and Pipe Fittings
The Contractor will submit all samples to the Engineer for approval, together with
Manufacturer's literature and installation instructions and obtain his full approval
before placing any material orders or commencing the works.
In cases where materials are not available in Imperial Measurements (as referred to)
the nearest size metric units or vice versa shall be provided, with prior approval of the
Engineer, at no extra cost to the contract.
3. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD
All materials provided for the contract will be in strict accordance with the latest
version of the applicable Indian Standards. All manufacturer's data, specifications
and relative information together with samples will be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to being purchased, otherwise at the contractor's own risk.
4. MATERIALS TRADE NAMES VARIATIONS
Tenders shall be based upon complete installations. Products required which are not
shown or mentioned, or not specified herein as to manufacturer; quality, etc. shall be
furnished of the highest quality.
Materials shall be new and free from all defects.
All materials, apparatus or equipment called for on the plans or in the specifications
by trade names, or the name of a particular manufacturer, or by catalogue reference
are the materials, apparatus, or equipment which should be allowed for in the
Tender, or qualification submitted at the time of Tender submission.
PA G E | 1 30
5. REGULATIONS
The work shall be carried out in accordance with all rules, regulations, by-laws and
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. All changes and alterations
required by an authorized inspector of any authority having jurisdiction should be
carried out at no cost to the Owner.
6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
These specifications shall be considered as an integral part of the drawings, which

accompany them. Neither the plans nor the specifications shall be used alone. Any
item or subject omitted from one, but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the
other shall be considered as properly and sufficiently specified and therefore must be
supplied by the contractor.
Misinterpretation of any requirements of either the drawings or specifications shall
not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for properly completing his work.
The contractor shall apply to the Engineer for any explanation, which he may require
in regard to the meaning and intent of any clause in the specification and contract.
He shall be held responsible for any errors or losses consequent upon failure to
obtain such explanation
The contractor shall consult with the Engineer to obtain detail drawings or
instructions for exact location of equipment as work progresses, before installing
fitting or equipment and will be responsible for coordination with all other work trades
including finishes.
Drawings show general location and routes to be followed by pipes, ducts, etc. where
not shown, or shown diagrammatically, the contractor shall install them in
accordance with best trade practices.
7. SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop and setting out drawings or
diagrams necessary in order to make clear the work intended or to show its relation
to adjacent work of other trades.
The contractor shall make any changes in such drawings or diagrams, which the
Engineer may require, consistent with the contract.
Details of shop drawings submitted for approval shall show clearly the relations of the
various parts to the main members and lines of the structure, and where correct
fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall
be made by the contractor and noted on the drawings before being submitted for
approval.
8. AS BUILT RECORD
The contractor shall request a complete set of mechanical drawings (white) from the
Engineer and use these for "As Built" records.
"As Built" records shall be retained in the site office and kept up to date daily in
regard to changes in actual installation from the plans and specifications. Alterations
to duct work, piping services, etc. shall be noted and the revised arrangement drawn
in accurately, complete with dimensions from column lines. Every precaution shall be
taken to protect the drawings from damage and loss.
PA G E | 1 31
The "As Built" records shall be made available to the Engineer upon request and
made available at each site meeting. After no further alteration can be expected and
the contract is nearing completion, the records shall be submitted for final approval.
The contractor shall include on "As Built" records the dimensions location of all
buried piping and valves, and during construction plainly mark location of exterior
services and valves to prevent damage to these until the project is completed.
9. CUTTING AND PATCHING
Openings not indicated on the Architectural or Structural drawings, which are

required for bringing equipment into the building or for other temporary or permanent
service, shall be approved by the Engineer. The contractor will provide maintain and
restore these openings and shall pay for their provision and restoration. Ample notice
shall be given of size and location of such openings.
The contractor shall ensure that he does not undertake any cutting that may impair
the strength of the building. No holes, except expansion bolts and small screws may
be drilled into the structure without obtaining prior approval.
Persons, skilled in the trades, shall do all cutting and patching work in a neat and
workman like manner.
10. PAINTING
All equipment supplied under this specification shall be delivered to the site with a
factory applied prime coat of paint unless noted otherwise. All supports and hangers
shall receive a prime coat of paint.
Painting where required for pipe, duct services, equipment identification, including
stenciling shall be carried out by a paint tradesman under this division in accordance
with the workmanship and material specification.
All factory prime-coated or finish coated equipment shall be touched up or repainted
if equipment is marred during shipment or installation.
11. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
Unless shown otherwise, the contractor shall be responsible for measures to control
the thermal movement of piping and apparatus. Piping shall be erected in such
manners that strain and weight do not come directly upon connections, joints or
apparatus.
Where possible, the effect shall be obtained by providing changes in direction and
loops in pipe runs, supplemented by the necessary guides, anchors and limit stops.
12. PIPE SLEEVES
An adequate number of sleeves (pipe inserts) of mild steel shall be provided where
pipes pass through concrete, masonry and similar work. The pipe inserts shall have a
flange welded in the center around its circumference, in order to provide water tight
and secure fixing into the structure. The sizes of the pipe sleeves (pipe inserts) shall
be as per the drawings supplied and / or as given below.
a. Sleeves through Exterior Walls below Grade:
i. Sleeves in exterior foundation walls below grade shall project 25 mm beyond
the outside surface of the wall and be flush with the inside surface.
ii. The annular space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be caulked with un-
tarred oakum and sealed with approved caulking compound. The sealing
PA G E | 1 32
shall be 25 mm deep from each side. The pipe and sleeve surfaces shall be
cleaned to enable good bonding. Allow 24 hours for setting of the compound.
The contractor shall adhere strictly to the manufacturer's recommendation.
b. Sleeves through Interior Wall, Floor and Ceilings:
i. Sleeves through interior masonry walls and partitions shall be set flush with
finished wall surfaces.
ii. Sleeves through floors in finished areas shall terminate 25 mm above the
finished floor.
iii. Sleeves through floors in service area (e.g., mechanical rooms) shall
terminate 50 mm above the finished floor.
iv. The annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be packed with Silicon
Rubber. In Machine Room, the packing shall be finished at both ends of the
sleeve with 6 mm deep caulking compound. In other areas the finishing may
be on the room side only.
v. Pipe insulation shall be carried full thickness through pipe sleeves.
Sleeves Size:
Out Side (OD) Diameter of Pipe Sleeve Size
(If Insulated, OD of Insulation) (Nominal Bore of the Pipe for Sleeve)
OD 20 mm to OD 32 mm NB 2" (50 mm)
OD 33 mm to OD 50 mm NB 2½" (65 mm)
OD 51 mm to OD 75 mm NB 4" (100 mm)
OD 76 mm to OD 110 mm NB 5" (125 mm)
OD 111 mm to OD 125 mm NB 6" (150 mm)
OD 126 mm to 160 mm NB 8" (200 mm)
OD 161 mm to OD 200 mm NB 10" (250 mm)
13. CLEAN UP
The contractor shall clean all exposed metal surfaces from grease, dirt or other
foreign materials. Chrome plated and polished work shall be left bright and clean. All
openings in pipes and fixtures shall be properly capped and plugged during
construction.
Fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected from damage during the
construction period and shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
14. PRESSURE TESTING
General:
i. These clauses shall apply to all piping systems including water supply and
drainage systems, which shall also be governed by the applicable
requirements of the IS specifications.
ii. The contractor shall notify the Engineer / Site In-Charge at least 24 hours in
advance of all tests.
iii. Tests of piping system or protection thereof shall include all apparatus
forming part of the complete systems, except where such apparatus is factory
tested prior to installation in the systems.
iv. All tests shall be performed before the application of pipe covering or before
being concealed.
PA G E | 1 33
v. For Drainage System, except where otherwise noted, all Soil, Waste, Rain
Water, Vent and Fittings shall be tested by Smoke Test and left in working
order after completion. The smoke test shall be carried out as stated below:
vi. Smoke shall be pumped into the Drainpipes at the lowest level from a smoke
machine, which consists of a blower and a burner.
vii. The materials usually burnt are greasy cotton waste, which form clear
pungent smoke that is easily detected by sight as well as by smell, if leaking
at any point of the drain. During testing if any joints are found leaking the
same shall be rectified by the contractor at no extra cost and to the
satisfaction of the Site–in-Charge.
viii. For Water Supply Line, except where otherwise noted, shall be tested by
Hydraulic Test and the test pressure shall be two times the maximum working
pressure of the systems, or 10 kgf per cm², whichever is greater. Test fluid
shall be water, unless otherwise indicated.
ix. Piping systems may be tested in whole or in part. Each system to be tested
shall be suitably isolated from existing or new systems using temporary
blanks between flanges (thickness of blanks shall be approved by the
Engineer), or caps. Where necessary for testing purposes, a pair of flanges
shall be installed in the piping system for the installation of blanks. Tests shall
not be performed against a closed valve.
x. All drains valves, safety or relief valves and other pressure sensitive devices
shall be removed prior to testing, and the openings capped or plugged. It is
not permissible to plug or seal safety or relief valves. Air shall be removed
from the highest points to the satisfaction of the Engineer before flushing vent
openings.
xi. Temporary blanks or caps shall be removed when testing has been
satisfactorily completed and drains, vents, safety or relief valves etc.
replaced.
xii. At least four hours shall elapse after erection before any welded or brazed
line is subjected to test pressure.
xiii. When test pressure is attained, the test pump or compressor shall be
disconnected and the connection capped. The test pressure gauge shall be
left in the system.
xiv. At least four hours shall elapse after test pressure is applied before the
system is inspected for leaks. All joints, glands, connections etc. shall be
carefully inspected for leaks and tightened as necessary.
xv. Test pressure shall be maintained without appreciable drop in pressure for a
minimum period of 24 hours.
xvi. Joints or connections, which continue to leak after tightening shall be
completely dismantled, checked, cleaned (replace if necessary), re-assemble
and retested. Opening, caulking or hemp shall not be used for leaking joints.
xvii. All water shall be drained from system following testing to prevent damage.
xviii. During testing, precautions shall be taken to prevent injury to persons or
property as a result of sudden rupture of a piping system.
PA G E | 1 34
EXCAVATION WORK
1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE:
The drainage, water supply and sewer lines are to be laid to alignment and gradients
shown on the drawings but subject to such modifications as shall be ordered by the
Engineer from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. No deviations from
the lines, depths of cuttings or gradients of sewers shown on the drawings shall be
permitted except by the express direction in writing of the Engineer.
2. EXCAVATION IN TUNNELS:
The excavation shall be open cutting unless the permission of the Engineer for the
ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing. Where Sewer lines have to be
constructed along narrow passages, the Engineer may order the excavation to be
made partly in tunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall be brought back
later on for refilling the trenches or tunnels.
3. OPENING OUT TRENCHES:
In excavating the trenches, etc. the soil, road metal, pavement, kerbing, etc. and turf
is to be placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the trench or other
excavation shall be filled up. The surface of all trenches and holes shall be restored
and maintained the satisfaction of the Engineer and of the owners of the roads or
other property traversed and the contractor shall not cut or break down any live fence
or trees in the line of the proposed works but shall seek tunnel under them unless the
Engineer shall order to the contrary.
The contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and other
excavations of all trees, stumps, roots and all other in cumbrances affecting
execution of the work & shall remove them from the site to the approval of the
Engineer.
4. OBSTRUCTION OF ROADS:
The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the
width of any road or street, and if sufficient space shall then be left for public &
private transit, he shall remove the materials excavated and bring them back again
when trench is required to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain the consent of the
Engineer in writing before closing any road to vehicular traffic, and the foot-walks
must be kept clear at all times.
5. REMOVAL OF SEWAGE:
All night soil, sewage or any other offensive matter met with during the excavation of
the works, immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cesspool, shall not
be deposited upon the surface or where it is likely to be a nuisance or passed into
any sewer or drain but shall, at once be put into carts and removed to a suitable
place to be provided by the contractor.
P A G E 1 35
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S EX C A V AT I ON W OR K
2.6 EXCAVATION TO BE TAKEN TO PROPER DEPTHS:

The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth to allow that the sewers shall rest
on concrete as described and so that the inverts may be at the levels given on the
sections. In bad ground the Engineer may order the contractor to excavate to a
greater depth than that shown on the drawings and to fill up the excavation to the
level of the sewer with concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials. The
contractor shall be paid extra at rates laid down for such works in the schedule if the
extra work was ordered by the Engineer in writing, but if the contractor should
excavate the trench to a greater depth than is required, without a specific order to
that effect in writing of the Engineer, the extra depth shall have to be filled up with
concrete at the contractor's own costs and charges to the requirements and
satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.7 BACKFILLING
After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be watertight the trench or
other excavations shall be backfilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that
no damage shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The filling in the
trenches and up to 300 mm above the crown of the sewer shall consist of the finest
selected materials placed carefully in 150 mm layers and consolidated, using
approved methods. After this has been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be
backfilled carefully in 150 mm layers with materials taken from the excavation, each
layer being watered to assist in the consolidation.
2.8 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE SETTLEMENTS AND DAMAGES
The contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good promptly during the
whole period the works are in hand, any settlements that may occur in the surfaces
of roads, footpaths, gardens, open spaces, etc. whether public or private caused by
his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents
caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expenses and charges, repair and make
good any damage done to buildings and other property. If in the opinion of the
Engineer he fails to make good such works with all practicable dispatch he shall be at
liberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid
by the contractor or deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or
recovered from him in any other manner according to the law of the land.
2.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS SOIL
The contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, provide places for disposal of all
surplus materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled the
surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the surface properly restored and
roadways and sides left clear.
2.10 TIMBERING OF SEWER AND TRENCHES
The contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of the
sewer trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting, and
they shall be close timbered in loose or sandy strata and below the surface of the
sub-soil water level.
All timbering, sheeting and piling with their walling and supports shall be of adequate
dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse or
subsidence of the walls of the walls of the trench shall take place.
The contractor shall be held responsible and accountable for the insufficiency of all
timbering, bracing, sheeting and piling used for, all damage to persons and property
resulting from improper quality, strength placing, maintaining or removing of the
same.
PA G E | 1 36
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S EX C A V AT I ON W OR K
2.11 SHORING OF BUILDINGS

The contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures the stability of
which is liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and shall be fully
responsible for all damages to persons to property resulting from any accident to any
of such buildings.
2.7 REMOVAL OF WATER FROM SEWER, TRENCHES ETC
The contractor shall at all time during the progress of the work keep the trenches and
excavations free from water which shall be disposed of by him in a manner as will
neither cause injury to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in
progress nor to the surface of any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with
the use of the same by the public.
If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width than specified
cross-section of the sewer with its envelope, the full width of the trench shall be filled
with concrete by the contractor at his own expense and charges to the requirements
of the Engineer.
The Engineer shall have power by giving an order in writing to the contractor to
increase the maximum width in respect of which payment will be allowed for
excavation in trenches for various classes of sewer, manholes, and other works in
certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him, where, on account of bad ground
or other unusual conditions, he considers that such increased width are necessary in
view of the site conditions.
Recommended width of trenches at the bottom of the trench is as follows:
Out Side Diameter of Pipe Bottom with of the Trench
Up to OD 110 mm Pipe 450 mm
From OD 111 to OD 160 mm Pipe 550 mm
From OD 161 to OD 250 mm Pipe 600 mm
Above OD 250 mm Pipe 750 mm
Minimum width of the bed concrete shall also be as above. No additional payment is
admissible for widths greater than specified.
PA G E | 1 37
SANITARY AND SEWER PIPES
1. GULLY TRAPS:
Gully traps shall be as per the drawing supplied.

Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:3:6 and a brick masonry chamber
350mm x 350 mm inside in cement mortar 1:3 with 150 mm x 150 mm grating inside
and 600 mm x 600 mm CI sealed cover and frame weighing not less than 7.3 kg to
be constructed as per standard drawings.
2. SEWER DRAINAGE AND SITE DRAINAGE:
The work covered under this section comprises of the supply and installation of the
following:
a. Night Soil and Waste Water drainage system complete
b. Strom Water drainage system complete
Pipes for these works shall be as follows:
a. Pipes up to OD 110 mm size should be of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
having working pressure of 4.0 kgf per sq cm in accordance with Nepal Standard
NS: 40 and carried out as described herein.
b. Pipes over OD 110 mm and up to OD 250 mm should be of High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe having working pressure of 2.5 kgf per sq cm
(minimum) in accordance with Nepal Standard NS: 40 and carried out as described
herein.
c. Pipes over 250 mm diameter, should be of Reinforced Cement Concrete Pipes
(RCC) Pipes (Hume Pipe) as per schedule NP-2 or NP-3 in accordance with Indian
Standard IS: 458 and carried out as described herein.
3. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE:
a. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: All High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Pipe in accordance with NS: 40 for Sewer Drainage lines passing under buildings,
floors, roads or paths with heavy traffic or in exposed positions above ground shall
be in but welded joints. The position of such pipes shall generally be shown on the
drawings or details.
b. Laying and Jointing of HDPE Pipes: HDPE Pipes shall be in thermal fusion but
welded joints. The jointing of pipes and fittings shall not be made with different
kinds of pipes and proprietary systems, but only by but welded joints.
Trenches, beds, surrounds and backfilling will be carried out as described herein
this specification, and as detailed in the Drawings or as directed by Site-in-Charge
to suit the site conditions as necessary.
4. HUME (RCC) PIPE:
a. Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) Pipes: Hume RCC (Hume) Pipes called for
on the drawings shall be Centrifugally Spun Reinforced Cement Concrete Pipes.
PA G E | 1 38
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S S AN I T AR Y A N D S E W E R P I P E S
Pipes shall be true perfectly round; free from cracks, cylinder, straight with a
uniform bore of specified internal diameter, throughout. Cracked or wrapped Pipes
with uneven texture
b. shall not be used. Pipe shall be of Class (Non Pressure Type) NP-1 or NP-3 as
specified and should confirm the Indian Standard (IS): 485. Adequate number of
collars as required shall also be supplied and installed along with the pipes.
c. Laying and Jointing of RCC (Hume) Pipes: RCC (Hume) Pipes shall be laid and
jointed as per the code of practice of cement concert pipes of Indian Standard (IS):
783. After setting out the pipe to correct grade / alignment, the collars shall be
centred over the joints and filled in with the tarred spun yarn, till the sufficient
space is left around the collar to receive the cement mortar. The space shall then
be filled with cement mortar in ratio of 1:1 (1 cement; 1 washed coarse sand) and
chalked by means of proper tools. All joints shall be finished at an angle of 45º to
the longitudinal axis of the pipe around the collars. The joints shall be cured for at
least 4 days. The joints shall be t4ested to a head of 2.5 metre of water column.
The majority of Sub Soil Drainage and Surface Water Drainage are routed in to
nearby drainage system running along the boundary wall and / or in to the water
stream near the area. The Contractor will allow for all work outside the site boundary,
including public protection, for the whole period of work while making the final
connection. The existing pavement, if broken up, will reinstate to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer and necessary Authority.
When sufficient approved material has been placed around and over the pipe, a
further bed of coarse aggregate (average 40 mm in size) will be placed of a depth of
150 mm, prior to back filling the trench with excavated materials. "Loose
Compaction" only shall be carried out in 300 mm layers up to the required level.
5. MANHOLES AND GREASE TRAP COLLECTION CHAMBERS:
Manholes and Chambers shall be constructed as shown in Detail Drawings, and

where shown on Site Services layout. Materials shall be of not less than 225 mm
Brickwork, cast-in-place concrete, or pre-cast concrete. Concrete shall be M20
strength. All brickwork shall be plastered in cement, sand (1:2). Gratings, lids and
castings in general shall be in Cast Iron in accordance with IS 5961 and built in or
fixed as detailed.
All manholes designated to be constructed shall be as specified in the Schedule of
Quantities.
All manholes shall be supported on a base of cement concrete of such thickness and
mix as given in the Schedule of Quantities or shown on the drawings.
Where not specified, manholes shall be constructed as follows:
Maximum Depth in mm Internal Dimensions of Manhole
Chamber
Up to 450 mm 450 mm x 600 mm
Over 450 mm and Up to 600 mm 600 mm x 600 mm

Over 600 mm and Up to 1'200 mm Dia 900 mm or 900 mm x 900 mm
Over 1'200 mm and Up to 3'000 mm Dia 1'200 mm or 900 x 1'200 mm
All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 mix. The
benching shall have a slope of 100 mm towards the channel. The depth of the
PA G E | 1 39
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S S AN I T AR Y A N D S E W E R P I P E S
channel shall be the full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a
floating coat of neat cement.
The manhole chamber covers and frames shall comply with the following
ratings:
Manhole Cover Out Side Size of Inside Size of Frame Weight in Kg
Frame
Light 27" x 27" 24 " x 24" or Ø 500 78.5 kg
mm
Heavy 27" x 27" 24 " x 24" or Ø 600 216 kg
mm
All manholes shall be plastered with 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement & 3
coarse sand) and finished inside with a floating coat of neat cement. Manholes shall
be plastered outside as above cut with rough plaster.
All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames and embedded in
reinforced cement concrete slab weight of cover and frame thickness of slab shall be
as specified in the Bill of Quantities or given above.
6. MAKING CONNECTIONS:
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting the
walls, benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel shall be
cut in the benching of the existing manhole for the new connections; contractor shall
remove all sewage and water if encountered in making the connection without
additional cost.
PA G E | 1 40
SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPING
1. SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES
1.1 Rigid PolyVinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes and fittings:

All soil, waste, vent and rain water pipes shall be Un-Plasticized Rigid Polyvinyl
Chloride (uPVC) soil, waste and rainwater (SWR) pipes unless specified otherwise.
All pipes shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore and other
manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be as per Nepal standard conforming to NS: 68
(or IS: 4985).
All fittings shall conform to Standard DIN: 19531 or BS: 4514. Fittings shall be of the
required degree with or without access door. All access doors shall be made up with
rubber gasket, while screw cover to make the fitting air and water tight.
The recommended joints of uPVC pipes shall be solvent cement joints or with rubber
ring socket joints. The rubber rings shall confirm to Indian Standard IS: 5382.
1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

uPVC Pipes: The pipes should be given adequate support at all time. Pipes should
be stored in a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections so that
the pipe is supported throughout its length. In storage, pipes racks should provide
continuous support and sharp corners of metal racks should be avoided. Socket and
spigot pipes should be stacked in layers with socket end placed at alternate ends of
the stacks to avoid top sided stacks. It is recommended not to store pipe inside
another pipe.
On no account pipes shall be stored in a stressed or bent condition or near the
source of the heat. Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 metres high and pipes
of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately.
The ends of pipes should be protected from abrasion and particularly those specially
prepared for jointing either by spigot or socket solvent cement joints.
If due to unsatisfactory storage of handling a pipe becomes 'kinked' the damaged
portion should be cut out completely. 'Kinking' is likely to occur in very thin walled
pipes.
1.3 Jointing of UPVC Pipes

Methods of Jointing:
i. Solvent Cement Joints
The technique is used with spigot and socket type joint, in which the socket is
made specially to form a close fit on the pipe end and with injection molded
fittings.
PA G E | 1 41
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S S O I L , W A S T E , V E N T A N D R AI N W A T E R P I P I N G
Solvent Cement of Supreme Industries Ltd. or equivalent make shall be used

as per the recommendations of the manufactures.
The dust, oil, water grease etc. should be wiped out with dry cloth from the
surface to be coated with solvent cement. The coating of solvent cement shall
be applied evenly on the inside of the fittings for full length of insertion and
then on the outside of the pipe end up to the marked line and the pipe twisted
to a quarter of a turn to spread the cement evenly at the same time ensuring
the pipe, pushed home fully into the socket. The pipe should be pushed into
the rifting socket and held for one to two minutes as otherwise the pipes
comes out of the fitting due to slippery quality of cement and the tapering
inside bore of the fitting. The surplus cement on the pipe surfaces shall be
wiped out. In most of the cases the pipe inserted should be up to the marked
line and in no case shall be less than 2/5 of the diameter of the pipe and up to
marked line.
When the joint is made, the remaining cement on the pipe surfaces shall be
wiped off immediately without fail as the continued action of solvent cement
will weaken the wall on the pipe and cause failure under pressure. For warm
place in summer month joints shall be made preferably early in the morning or
in the evening, when it is cooler and for cold place in winter joints shall be
made preferably during the day (sunny) when it is warm.
Since solvent cements are inflammable they should not be used near the
naked flames. In certain cases fumes given off from solvent cement may be a
source of danger if not carried in a ventilated area.
When not in use, containers of solvent cement should be kept closed tightly to
avoid loss of solvent or entry of dirt. Cement, which has gelled or hardened,
should be discarded.
ii. Rubber Ring Joints or 'O' Ring Shrink Joints (Shaft Piping)
uPVC pipe and uPVC pipe fittings may be jointed with approved rubber ring to
provide the watertight seal. The ring may be housed in groove formed in the
socket housing. The rubber is compressed and makes a seal between the
pipe and the housing. It is advisable to use uPVC Lubricant for proper sliding
of the pipe end to the rubber socket piece.
iii. With Cast Iron (CI) Fitting
For Rain Water Pipe Line, the uPVC Pipe End at the roof level where rain
water enters the uPVC Pipe should have Cast Iron (CI) Pipe Fitting (CI Tee if
possible otherwise CI Bend). The CI Fittings can be connected to the uPVC
pipe or uPVC Pipe Fitting by inserting the end of CI pipefitting inside the bell
mouth end of uPVC pipe or uPVC pipe fitting. Both pipe ends to be connected
should be heated and the bell mouth of the uPVC pipe or uPVC pipe fitting
should be slide over the portion of the CI pipe fitting and should be pressed
by hand uniformly all around till both the pipes cool down. The uPVC should
be heated by hot air blower not naked flame.
1.4 FIXING TO SUPPORTS

The pipes and specials (fittings) before being laid of fixed shall be examined to see
that there are no cracks or defects. The pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all dust and dirt. After laying or fixing the pipes in position they shall be arranged in
such a way that centre line of pipes coincide with the centre line of the alignment.
Fittings, cleanout and floor drains shall also be laid in their position as stated above
uPVC Pipes shall be fixed vertically in shaft by means of uPVC clips anchored to
PA G E | 1 42
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S S O I L , W A S T E , V E N T A N D R AI N W A T E R P I P I N G
walls using uPVC washers, Galvanized Screws and Plastic dowels. In case of pipes
laid horizontally, pipe shall be supported on M.S. Brackets / Hangers of approved
design clamped with uPVC Clips.
All pipes laid shall have its open ends securely closed with appropriate plugs during
progress of work. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed by using proper approved holder
bat clams and special hangers. The pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in a line
as directed or as shown in the drawings. The pipes, lay vertically or horizontally shall
have the supporting clamps, hangers, Brackets, etc., as per the specification or as
directed by the site in charge. uPVC bat clamps holders shall be used to fix all
vertical uPVC pipes in truly vertical position. Branch pipes shall be connected to the
stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. Each stack shall be terminated at top
for vent. Horizontal pipes running below the ceiling shall be fixed on structural with
adjustable clamps. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope as mentioned in the
drawings and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on
them. As per the site condition, if required or directed by the site in charge, pre-
fabricated semicircular (half the diameter of the said pipe) made out of Plain GI Sheet
of proper thickness shall be provided below the horizontal running pips along with
above-mentioned adjustable clamps.
1.5 TESTING
All uPVC Soil, Waste, Vent, Rain Water (SWR) pipes and uPVC pipe fittings shall be
tested by smoke test and left in working order after completion. The smoke test shall
be carried out as stated below:
Smoke shall be pumped into the SWR pipes at the lowest level from a smoke
machine, which consists of a blower and a burner.
The materials usually brunt are greasy cotton waste which form clear pungent smoke
which is easily detectable by sight as well as by smell if leaking at any point of the
drain. During testing if any joint is found leaking the same shall be rectified by the
Contractor at no extra cost & to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.6 NAHANI OR FLOOR TRAPS

Nahani or floor traps shall be UPVC or Cast Iron, deep seal with an effective seal of
50 mm. As per drawing, Waste pipes may be discharged over the trap. The trap and
waste pipes shall be set in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural
floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate)
and extended 35 mm below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all
necessary shuttering and centering for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 300 mm
x 300 mm and of the required depth.
1.7 CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD

Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building work proceeds. Contractor shall provide
all necessary sleeves, holes and chases in structural members as building work
proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or left originally they shall be made good with
cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate) and the
surface restored as in original condition. No additional payment shall be made for
cutting and making good of holes.
PA G E | 1 43
WASTE PIPES FROM APPLIANCES
1. WASTE PIPES FROM APPLIANCES
Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash-basins, shower, bath tub, sinks, drinking
fountain, urinals, water closets, etc. shall be of uPVC as given in the Schedule of
Quantities or drawings. "Galvanized or Black Wrought Iron Pipes or Pipe Fittings
should not be used for Soil Pipes, Waste Pipes, Rain Water Pipes, Anti-Siphon
Pipes, Vent Pipes or Drain Pipes from any appliances."
All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the out fall drain. Pipes inside a toilet room
shall be chased unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Where required pipes may
be run at ceiling level in suitable gradient as mentioned in the drawing or directed by
the site in charge and supported on structural clamps.
2. CLEAN OUTS
Clean-outs shall be full pipe size up to 110 mm and a minimum of 110 mm on larger
pipe. A clean out shall be installed at, or as close as possible to, the base of every
vertical waste, soil and drain stack. A clean out shall be installed at the up-slope of
each pipe at which a building drain or branch changes direction by more than 45°.
Clean-outs in horizontal drainage piping shall be at intervals not greater than:
- 15 m where the piping is of dia 100 mm and smaller.
- 30 m where the piping is of large than dia 100 mm.
- 6 m where waste pipes are horizontally connected to sinks.
Nickel Bronze or Stainless Steel Floor Plates with Frames shall be installed on
finished floors for access to clean-outs. Clean-outs on horizontal lines in finished
areas shall be as per IS specifications.
PA G E | 1 44
WATER SUPPLY
1. PIPE LINE:
All Water Supply Pipe Line shall be as mentioned in the drawings and Bill of
quantities.
The Pipes may be:
2. GALVANISED MILD STEEL (GI) PIPE & FITTINGS:
Hot Deep Galvanized (GI) Electric Resisted Welded (ERW) Mild Steel Tubes / Pipes
conforming to IS: 1239 of class specified, when class is not specified they shall be
Class-B (Medium) of approved brand.
Pipe Fittings shall be Hot Deep Galvanized Malleable Cast Iron confirming to IS:
1879 of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Sockets / Couplings, Elbows, Bends,
Tees, Reducers, Unions, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark and ISI Mark should be
stamped on the GI Pipe Fittings.
GI Pipe and GI pipe Fittings shall have threaded joints as per the manufactures
specifications with TEFLON Tape. After cutting the threads in the pipe, care shall be
taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools.
3. CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC) PIPE & FITTINGS:
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Tubes / Pipes of Class 13.5 in Copper Tube
Size (CTS) dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2846 of approved brand.
Pipe Fittings shall be of Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) of Class 11 in Copper
Tube Size (CTS) dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2846 of approved brand. The
Pipe Fittings are Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees, Transition Coupling, Transition
Bushings, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark should be stamped on the CPVC Pipe
Fittings.
CPVC Pipe and CPVC Pipe Fittings shall have cold weld joints by CPVC Solvent
cement confirming to ASTM: 493. After cutting the pipe, care shall be taken to
remove burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools. Only with TEFLON tape,
threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with CPVC Threaded Adopters.
4. LEAD FREE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE & FITTINGS:
Lead Free Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubes / Pipes of Schedule: 40, dimensions
conforming to ASTM: D 1785 and Materials conforming to ASTM: D 1784 of
approved brand.
Pipe Fittings shall be of Lead Free Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) of Schedule: 40,
dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2466 of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are
Couplings,
PA G E | 1 45
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S W AT ER S UP PL Y
Elbows, Bends, Tees, Transition Coupling, Transition Bushings, etc. Manufacturer's

Trademark should be stamped on the CPVC Pipe Fittings.
PVC Pipe and PVC Pipe Fittings shall have cold weld joints by PVC Solvent cement
confirming to ASTM: D 2564. After cutting the pipe, care shall be taken to remove
burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools. Only with TEFLON tape,
threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with PVC Threaded Adopters.
5. POLY PROPYLENE RANDOM COPOLYMER (PP-R) PIPE & FITTINGS:
Poly Propylene Random Copolymer (PP-R) Tubes / Pipes and Pipe Fittings
conforming to DIN: 8077 / 8078 of Class as specified (if not specified should be of PN
20 Series) of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees,
Transition Coupling, Transition Bushings, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark should be
stamped on the PP-R Pipes and Pipe Fittings.
PP-R Pipes and PP-R Pipe Fittings shall have hot fusion welding process at 260º C
as per the manufacturer’s specifications, instructions and guideline. Only with
TEFLON tape, threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with PP-R Threaded Adopters.
6. LAYING
All Pipes and fittings shall be of class specified in BOQ manufactured under
respective Standards.
All main supply pipes and other pipes to be laid under the ground shall be laid over a
minimum of 600 mm sand bedding or selected granular material compacted as
described herein this specification.
The water main shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with
fittings, valves, and connections at the required locations and all valves and stems
plumb.
Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided and used by the Contractor
for the safe and convenient performance for the work.
All pipes, valves and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece
by hand ropes or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent
damage to water main materials and protective coatings and linings.
Under no circumstances shall water main materials be dropped or dumped into the
trench.
Valves, valve covers, meters, tapping sleeves and other accessories shall be
installed as per the manufacturer's recommendations and in conjunctions and
compliance with the requirements of the Local Government or Public Service
Authority specifications.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install all proper size pipe
bends for both horizontal and vertical deflections that are required to construct the
water main to the line and grade as shown and specified.
7. JOINTING
The jointing shall be made in accordance with the instructions of the pipe and fitting
manufactures. The pressure pipe shall be tested to a minimum of 10 kg / sq. cm.
pressure.
PA G E | 1 46
The setting and arrangement of pipes shall be as per the working drawings. Pipes
are cut to size and ends are squared.
The pipes and fittings shall be inspected at the site before use. Where the pipes have
to be cut, the end shall be carefully plugged so that no obstruction to bore is affected.
The pipe shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matters before being laid. For
joining, the outside of pipe (thread for GI pipe line) and the inside of the socket shall
be cleaned. Care should be taken that all pipes and fittings are properly joined so as
to make the joints completely watertight.
After lying, the open ends of the pipe shall be temporarily plugged to prevent access
of water, soil or any other foreign materials.
Jointing of pipes shall be made according to the different kind of pipes by thread
screwing, cold welding, flanges, or flexible joints etc. Joints between dissimilar
materials, e.g. copper shall be by means of copper-alloy unions or union ferrules, etc.
Care shall be taken to ensure that all piping and fittings are clean internally and free
from particles of sand, soil, metal, plastic, filings and chips, etc.
8. CLAMPS
All pipes laid shall have its open ends securely closed with appropriate plugs during
progress of work. Pipes and pipe fittings shall be fixed by using proper approved
holder bat clams and special hangers. The pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in
a line as directed or as shown in the drawings. The pipes laid vertically shall have
supporting, the clamps at 1.5 metres centre to centre and the pipes laid horizontally,
the clamps at every 1.2 metres centre to centre as shown in the Drawing or as
directed by the site in charge. MS bat clamps holders shall be used to fix all vertical
pipes in truly vertical position. Horizontal pipes running below the ceiling shall be
fixed on structural with adjustable clamps. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform
slope as mentioned in the drawings and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so
that the pipes fully rest on them. As per the site condition, if required or directed by
the site in charge, pre-fabricated semicircular (half the diameter of the said pipe)
made out of Plain GI Sheet of proper thickness shall be provided below the horizontal
running pips along with above-mentioned adjustable clamps. No Iron hooks shall
anchor pipes in wall chases.
9. TESTING WATER SERVICE LINES
The water service lines shall be hydrostatically tested. Test pressure shall be 10 kg /
sq. cm. and the pipes shall be tested for the specified pressure for 24 hours.
Defective pipes, pipe fittings and pipe joints shall be replaced or repaired immediately
and retested.
10. DI-ELECTRIC UNIONS
Dielectric unions shall be installed at every connection between iron / steel and
coppers / brass / bronze.
11. UNIONS
Adequate number of unions shall be provided on all pipelines to enable to dismantle

later. Unions shall be provided near each valve, stopcock, and check valve and in
case of GI Pipe - at an interval of 6 m (20 ft.) on straight runs.
PA G E | 1 47
12. FLANGES (GI PIPE LINE)
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes over NB 1½" GI Pipe line.

Connections shall be made by the correct number and size of nuts and bolts and
made with 3-mm thick insertion rubber washer.
13. VALVES
13.1 SHUT-OFF VALVE:

- Gate Valves shall be heavy gunmetal full way type conforming to IS: 778
(Class: II). Valves shall be tested at manufacturer's works to 21 kg / sq. metre and
shall have manufacturer's name stamped on it.
13.2 CHECK (NON RETURN) VALVES:

- Check Valves / Non Return Valves shall be heavy gunmetal Swing Type
conforming to IS: 778 (Class: II). Valves shall be tested at manufacturer's works to 21
kg / sq. metre and shall have manufacturer's name stamped on it.
The Engineer shall approve all valves before installation work up to 65 mm and small
shall be gunmetal
13.3 ISOLATING VALVES

Isolating valves shall be provided on all branch lines to enable isolation of groups of
fixtures and sections of building and as shown on drawings.
13.4 DRAIN POINTS

Drain valves shall be installed in all liquid carrying systems at the low points to
facilitate complete drainage of the system.
13.5 HOSE BIBS

Hose bibs in the building shall be cast brasses with a leather disc, screwed pipe end,
20 mm pipe hose tread. Hose bibs in finished areas shall be chromium plated.
13.6 PAINTING (GI Pipe Line)

All GI Pipe Line above ground shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paints
of approved quality and then two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality
and color.
All pipes in chases shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paint of approved
quality and then two coats of bitumen paint.
All pipes below ground shall be covered with a tape of bitumen felt 15-kg/sq. m over
a layer of cold applied bitumen and then a final layer of bitumen shall also be applied.
PA G E | 1 48
EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
1. PIPES
All pipes lay outside of the building and generally underground shall be considered
as External Water Supply. The types of Pipe and Pipe Fittings shall be as per
drawings and / or as mentioned in the Bill of Quantities. The installation of pipe line
shall be properly carried out and should be completely watertight. All fixtures and
fittings shall be properly installed and checked against leaks at designated pressure.
Necessary Pipe Sleeves in the wall, floor, etc should be provided as per the
specification.
2. EXCAVATION
Generally, external water mains pipe shall be laid a minimum of 600 mm below
ground level. Excavation for trenches shall be done as specified elsewhere, but the
depth of the trenches shall be as follow
Size of Pipe Width of Trench Depth of Trench

For dia 15 mm to 50 mm 300 mm 750 mm
For 65 mm to 100 mm 450 mm 1'000 mm
3. BACKFILLING
Backfilling of trenches shall not commence until the pipes therein have been tested
and approved by the site in charge. Under non-paved areas selected excavated
materials free from large stones refuse, or organic material as approved by the
Engineer shall do the backfill.
PA G E | 1 49
INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY
1. PIPES
All pipes inside the building from Over Head Tank to the Toilets and Kitchen and
where specified, shall be considered as Internal Water Supply Pipe Line. The types
of Pipe and Pipe Fittings shall be as per drawings and / or as mentioned in the Bill of
Quantities. The installation of pipe line shall be properly carried out and should be
completely watertight. All fixtures and fittings shall be properly installed and checked
against leaks at designated pressure. Expansion of hot water pipes shall be
compensated for by flexible piping layouts and / or by utilizing bends in pipe line.
Necessary Pipe Sleeves in the wall, floor, etc as well as pipe supports, clamps,
brackets, etc should be provided as per the specification and instruction of the site in
charge.
PA G E | 1 50
PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
1. PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
The pipes and pipe fittings before being laid or fixed shall be examined to see that
there are no cracks or defects. The pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of
all dust and dirt. After laying or fixing the pipes in position they shall be arranged in
such a way that centre line of pipes coincide with the centre line of the alignment.
Fittings, Valves, etc., shall also be laid in their position as stated above. CPVC or
PVC Pipes shall be fixed by push fit before any solvent cement is applied and when
cleared by the site in charge then only permanent joints to be made. All the horizontal
and vertical run pipes should be supported to walls with the help of PVC Pipe Clamps
that should be anchored by Galvanized Screws and Plastic dowels. In case of pipes
laid horizontally under ceiling, pipe shall be supported on M.S. Brackets / Hangers of
approved design.
SPACING FOR SUPPORTS & HANGERS OF FIXING FOR INTERNAL PIPING

Kind of Size of Interval for Pipe Interval for Pipe
Pipe Pipe Line Supports for Horizontal Supports for Vertical
Run Pipe Line Run Pipe Line
GI Pipe NB ½" 2.00 m 2.50 m
Line
for NB ¾" 2.50 m 3.00 m
water
NB 1" 2.50 m 3.00 m
Supply
NB 1¼" 3.00 m 3.50 m
NB 1½" 3.00 m 3.50 m

NB 2" 3.50 m 4.50 m
NB 2½" 3.50 m 4.50 m

NB 3" 3.50 m 5.00 m
CPVC / 15 mm / ½ 1.25 m 1.25 m

PVC / PP-R "
Pipe Line 20 mm / ¾" 1.50 m 1.50 m
for
Water 25 mm / 1" 1.50 m 1.50 m
Supply
32 mm / 1.75 m 1.75 m
1¼"
40 mm / 1.75 m 1.75 m
1½"
50 mm / 2" 2.00 m 2.00 m
uPVC OD 50 mm 1.50 m 2.00 m
PA G E | 1 51
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S P I P E S U P P O R T AN D H A N G E R
Kind of Size of Interval for Pipe Interval for Pipe

Pipe Pipe Line Supports for Horizontal Supports for Vertical
Run Pipe Line Run Pipe Line
Pipe Line OD 75 mm 2.00 m 2.50 m
for
Soil, Waste OD 110 2.00 m 3.00 m
& Rain mm
Water OD 160 2.50 m 3.00 m
mm
PA G E | 1 52
MEASUREMENT
1. MEASUREMENT
GI, uPVC, CPVC, Lead Free PVC and PP-R Pipe Line above ground or underground
shall be measured per running meter and the rate shall be inclusive of all fittings
including unions, Hangers, Brackets, Clamps, Pipe Sleeves, cutting chases, etc on
wall, ceiling, floor and making good the same and testing of pipes and fittings,
making good.
GI pipes below ground shall be measured per running meter and the rate shall be
inclusive of all fittings including unions, except the excavation for trenches refilling
and disposal of surplus earth and testing of pipes and fittings, making good.
Other Fixtures such as Gunmetal valves, non-return valves, ball cocks, foot valves,
stop cocks, bib cocks, etc., shall be measured by number.
PA G E | 1 53
PIPE INSULATION
1. PIPE INSULATION
All Hot Water Supply and Hot Water Return Pipe Lines shall be insulated (if required)
with extruded Synthetic Rubber Polymer Compound, pre-formed tubular sectioned
pipe insulation. The pipe insulation shall be fixed using proper adhesive and self-
adhesive tapes as per the manufacturer’s specifications. Specialist skilled workmen
trained in the trade shall apply all insulation strictly as per manufacturer
recommendations. Before applying insulation, all pipe work and fittings shall be
brushed clean, all dust, dirt and oil removed. Each length of piping to be insulated
shall be tested for its performance requirements. Only such pipe lengths, which are
free from defect, shall be insulated. After testing the pipe lengths shall be dried out.
All insulation on ducts and piping shall be continuous and full thickness and as
specified where passing through walls, floors, partitions and pipe sleeves.
2. PROTECTION OF INSULATION
Where insulation is liable to be damaged, it shall be adequately protected as desired

by the Engineer. The protection shall consist of a 20 mm thick cement plaster (1
cement: 6 coarse washed sand) applied continuously over the GI wire mesh on the
pipe. The plaster shall be finished smooth to receive painting and other finishes.
PA G E | 1 54
BATHROOM FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
1. BATHROOM FIXTURES
All bathroom fixtures, Ceramic and CP fittings shall be supplied as per schedule 1
and install in position including transportation to site of work. No allowances shall be
made for theft, breakage and defective materials after taking delivery of the
materials.
2. INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to
complete the item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically mentioned
or not in the Schedule of Quantities, Specifications and Drawings.
The Bathroom fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position
as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer, and shall fully meet with
the esthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Engineer.
All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching
the tiles or interior finish as per Engineer requirements. Wherever necessary, the
fittings shall be centered to dimensions and pattern as called for.
Skilled workman shall install fixtures with appropriate tools according to the best
trade practice. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for the installation of
fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height, mounting as called for on the
drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment.
3. MOCK UP AND TRAIL ASSEMBLY:
The installation of the bathroom fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop
drawings approved by the Engineer.
The contractor shall assemble on trial basis at least one set of each type of bathroom
fixture and fittings in order to determine precisely the required supply and disposal
connection. Relevant instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable.
This trial assembly shall be developed to facilitate determining the location of
punctures, holes, holding devices etc. that will be required for final installation in
position of all bathroom fixtures and fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to
final approval by the Engineer.
The fixtures in the trial assembly can be reused for final installation without any
additional payments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures.
4. SUPPORTING AND FIXING DEVICES
The contractor at his own cost shall where required, provide all fixtures and fittings
securely in position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building
structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not
present an unsightly look in the final assembly. These shall be installed complete
with appropriate washers and gaskets, jointing Materials and Screws etc. as per
manufacture manuals.
PA G E | 1 55
Specifications for Sanitary Works Bathroom Fixtures and Fittings
5. FINAL INSTALLATION
The contractor at his own cost shall install all bathroom fixtures and fittings in their
final position in accordance with approved trail assemblies and as shown on
drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and waste connections.
The connection between built-in piping system and the bathroom fixtures shall be
through proper couplings, unions and flanges to facilitate removal / replacement of
bathroom fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All couplings, unions
and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed fittings.
Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment. The outlets of water
closet bowls and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are
butting on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the
receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted attention
shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes.
Overflows shall be arranged as to give visible warning and discharge. A check shall
be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for
supporting Water Closets, Wash Basins, Sinks and other appliances.
6. PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE AND THEFT
The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all bathroom fixtures and fittings
issued to them against damage, misuse, crazing, staining, breakage and pilferage by
providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till the completion and handing
over of the installation. At the time of handing over, the contractor shall clean,
disinfect and polish all fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged,
cracked, chipped, stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings
free from defects shall be installed at his own cost to complete the work.
PA G E | 1 56
TESTING
1. TESTING
All fixtures and fittings shall be tested for their proper performance by the Contractor
thoroughly to satisfy the Engineer that they are in order, before applying for virtual
completion.
PA G E | 1 57
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
1. IDENTIFICATION COLOUR CODE
All piping systems shall be suitably painted or otherwise color identification of pipes
as per IS: 2065 (code of practice for water supply in buildings). The identification
colors and letter symbols for various services shall be as follows:
Service Identification Letter Symbol
Colour
1 Soil, Waste and Vent Piping and all Black or Brown S
drains (except for PVC and HDPE
pipe)
2. Water Supply Lines Green CWS
3. Hot Water Supply Red HWS
4. Hot Water Return Orange HWR
5. Gas Supply Pipe Line Golden Yellow GAS
6. Fire Hydrant Pipe Line Blue FH
The letter symbols shall either be legibly painted or affixed in an appropriate manner
to be read conveniently. Locations where painting cannot be done, fastening self-
adhesive PVC tapes of appropriate color in an approved manner shall identify the
piping system. The tapes varying in 15 mm to 50 mm wide strips depending on the
size of pipe on which the tapes are fastened shall be applied at regular intervals on
continuous runs and at all bends junctions and tees.
2. PAINTING
The Contractor shall supply all materials, labor tools and other equipment necessary
for carrying out painting work. Painting as described herein shall be applied to all
surfaces requiring painting. Paint materials used in the work shall be of approved
make of ready mixed variety supplied to site in manufactures original containers.
Thinning where necessary shall only be done as per manufactures instructions. All
surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned free of all dirt and dust before painting is
started. Painting shall only be started after the receiving surfaces are in a condition fit
to receive painting as certified by the Engineer. Properly qualified, skilled and
experienced painters shall be employed to painting work.
3. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All steel and iron surfaces to be painted shall be washed with mineral spirits to
remove all dirt and grease. Where rust or scale is present, the surfaces shall be wire
PA G E | 1 58
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S
brushed to remove such rust. The cleaned surfaces shall be given one coat of approved
phosphate before priming coat is applied.
All galvanized metal to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with naphthalene and
treated with a solution of 20 litres of 36% acetic acid, 1.35 kg. of blue vitriol and 1.35 kg.
Of powered alum dissolved in 225 litres of water.
4. PAINTING FINISHES
The Painting Finishes shall consist of the operations briefly mentioned below:
All cast iron soil, waste vent pipes, manhole covers, gratings and frames shall be
painted with three coats of bituminous base paint.
All cast iron mains pipes shall be painted with one coat Zinc Chromate primer followed
by three coats of synthetic enamel paint.
All non-galvanized steel surfaces shall be painted with one coat of Zinc Chromate
primer followed by three coast of synthetic enamel paint.
All galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanized metal primer after washing with
galvanized metal cleaner. The surface shall then be painted with three coats of synthetic
enamel paint.
Pipe surface of the HDPE, uPVC, CPVC, Lead Free PVC, PP-R Pipes and Pipe Fittings
shall not be painted with Synthetic Paints unless otherwise instructed.
All painted finished surfaces shall be smooth throughout and retain a consistent uniform
shade all through. Where in the opinion of the Engineer, the painting is not consistent in
application or appearance; the contractor at his own cost shall redo the painting to his
satisfaction.
5. DISINFECTING THE PIPING SYSTEM
Before commissioning the water supply system the contractor shall arrange to disinfect
the entire system as described in the succeeding paragraph.
The water pipes shall first be filled with water and thoroughly flushed out. The storage
tanks shall then be filled with water again and disinfecting chemical containing chlorine
added gradually while tanks are being filled to ensure through mixing. Sufficient
chemical shall be used to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million
parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used, the proportions will be 150 gms of
powder to 1'000 litres of water. The powder shall be mixed with water in the storage
tank. If a proprietary brand of chemical is used the proportions shall be as specified by
the makers. When the storage tank is full, the supply shall be stopped and all the taps
on the distributing pipes opened successively working progressively away from storage
tank. Each tap shall be closed when the water discharge begins to smell of chlorine.
The storage tank shall then be filled up with water from supply pipe and added with
more disinfecting chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipe
shall then remain charged at least for three hours. Finally the tank and pipes shall be
thoroughly flushed out before any water is used for domestic purposes.
6. CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
All inlets, outlets, valves piping and other incidental work connected with installation of
all Mechanical equipment supplied by other agencies shall be carried out by the
Contractor in accordance with the Drawings, requirements for proper performance of
equipment manufactures instruction and the directions of the Engineer.
The equipment’s to be supplied by the other agencies consist mainly of Water
Treatment Plant, Hydro-Pneumatic System and Boiler for Hot Water, Pumps, Kitchen
PAGE | 159
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R S A N I T A R Y W O R K S MI S CE LL A NE OU S W O RK
Equipments and Laundry Equipments. The connections to the various equipments shall
be connected through proper unions / flanges and isolating valves. The work of
connections shall be executed in accordance with the requirement of equipment
suppliers, under the directions of the Consultant. The various aspects of connection
work shall be executed in a manner similar to the work of respective trades mentioned
elsewhere in the specification.
7. SAFETY CODE
 First aid appliance shall be maintained in a readily accessible place including

adequate supply of sterilized dressings and cotton wool.
 An injured person shall be taken on a public hospital without loss of time, in cases
where the injury necessitates hospitalization.
 Suitable and strong scaffolds should be provided for all works that cannot safely be
done from ground.
 No portable single ladder shall be over 8 meters in length. The width between the
side rails shall not be less than 30 cm (clear) and the distance between two adjacent
runs shall not be more than 30 cms. When a ladder is used an extra laborer shall be
engaged for holding the ladder.
 The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1.5 meters of the edge of the
trench or half of the depth of trenches whichever is more. All trenches and
excavations shall be provided with necessary fencing and lighting.
 Every opening in the floor of a building or in working platform be provided with
suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by providing suitable
fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be one metre.
 No floor, roof or other part of the structure shall be over loaded with debris or
materials as to render it unsafe.
 Workers employed on mixing and handling materials such asphalt, cement mortar or
concrete and lime mortar shall be provided with protective foot wear and rubber
hand gloves.
 Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder's protective eye-
shields and gloves.
 No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used.
 Suitable facemasks should be provided to the workers when the paint is applied in
the form of spray or surface having lead paint dry rubbed and scraped.
 The Contractor to the painter shall supply overalls and adequate facilities shall be
provided to enable the working painters to wash during the periods of cessation of
work.
 Hoisting machines and tackle used in the works, including their attachments,
anchorage and supports shall be in perfect condition.
 The ropes use in hoisting or lowering material or as means of suspension shall be of
durable quality and adequate strength and free from defects.
PA G E | 1 60
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR S AN I T ARY W O RK S S AN I T A R Y S C H E D U L E
SANIT ARY SCHEDULE 1
SN Description Size Model N0. Make Inlet Size Outlet Remarks

Cold Hot Size
1.00 Water Closet Set:
1.01 Type: 'WC-1' consisting of:
1.01.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Floor - # CO209 + # "INDUS" ½" - 100 mm
Mounted Close Coupled `S' trap Water Closet C0769 + # Parryware, India
Basin with Duel Flushing (3/6 lts) Cistern and E8308
Double Flap, Solid Section, White Seat with
Cover, Hinges, etc
1.01.b CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with - # G3453A1 "AMBER" ½" - ½"
CP Wall Flange for Cistern Parryware, India
1.01.c CP Flexible Connection Hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½"
1.01.d CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
Parryware, India
1.01.e CP Robe Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
1.02 Type: 'WC-2' (for Persons with Physical Limitations) consisting of:
1.02.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Wall - # CO209 + # "INDUS" - - 100 mm
Hung `P' trap Water Closet Basin and also E8308 Parryware, India
Double Flap, Solid Section, White Seat with
Cover, Hinges, etc
1.02.b Concealed Flushing Cistern 80 mm thick - # C821099 "LINEA-N" ½" - 40 mm
including WC Outlet Bend with WC Connector Parryware, India
Pipe, WC Fastening Bracket, threaded bolts,
Integrated Stop Valve with R½" water supply
Connector Pipe
1.02.c CP Twin Actuator Plate (with Squre Push - # C821499 "LINEA-N" - - -
Buttons - Satin Finish) for above Concealed Parryware, India
PA G E | 16 1
Cistern
1.02.d CP Health Faucet with 7 mm dia x 1 m long - # ALD-CHR- Jaquar, India ½" - -
Flexible Tube and Wall Bracket 585
1.02.e CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with - # CQT-23059 Jaquar, India ½" - ½"
CP Wall Flange for Health Faucet
1.02.f CP Toilet Paper Holder with Flap - # ACN-1151N Jaquar, India - - -
1.02.g CP Twin Robe Hook - # ACN-1161N Jaquar, India - - -
2.00 Squatting (Asian) Pan Set:
2.01 Type: 'SP-1' consisting of:
2.01.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Floor 500 x 400 x # C0123 + 'P' Parryware, India 1¼" - 100 mm
Mounted Squatting (Asian) Pan with PVC 'P' 210 mm Trap (110 mm)
Trap
2.01.b White Glazed Plastic Duel Flushing Cistern with 3/6 lts # E8177 "SUPERIO" ½" - 1¼"
necessary fittings, Installation Kit, Flush Bend Parryware, India
Pipe, etc.
2.01.c CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with - # G3453A1 "AMBER" ½" - ½"
CP Wall Flange for Health Faucet Parryware, India
2.01.d CP Flexible Connection Hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½"
2.01.e CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
Parryware, India
3.00 Wash Basin Set:
3.01 Type: 'WB-1' consisting of:
3.01.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Corner 450 x 330 X "Corner Basin" Parryware, India ½" - 1¼"
Basin Basin including fixing Bolts 145 mm # Co408
3.01.b CP Bottle Trap, 32 mm size with Wall 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼"
Connection Pipe, Wall Flange & Washer, etc.
3.01.c CP Half Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9910A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
3.01.d CP Pillar Cock for Wash Basin - # G3402A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
Parryware, India
3.01.e CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with - # G3453A1 "AMBER" ½" - ½"
PA G E | 16 2
3.01.f CP Flexible Connection Hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½"
3.01.g CP Robe Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
3.01.h CP Soap Dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, - - -
India

3.02.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Wall 450 x 330 X "FLAIR" # Parryware, India ½" - 1¼"
Hung Lavatory Basin (Counter not included) 145 mm C0461
Lavatory Basin including fixing Bolts
Parryware, India
India
India

3.02.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Wall 450 x 330 X "FLAIR" # Parryware, India ½" - 1¼"
Hung Lavatory Basin (Counter not included) 145 mm C0461
Lavatory Basin including fixing Bolts
Parryware, India
PA G E | 16 3
India
India
3.03 Type: 'WB-3' (for Persons with Physical Limitations) consisting of:
3.03.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Wall 520 x 465 "PAL" # C8441 Parryware, India - - 40 mm
hung Lavatory Basin including fixing Bolts
3.03.b CP Bottle Trap with Internal Partition, 32 mm 250 x 190 # ALD-769 Jaquar, India 40 mm - 40 mm
size with 250 mm & 190 mm long Wall
Connection Pipe, Wall Flange & Washer
3.03.c CP Half Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size, - # ALD-709L130 Jaquar, India 40 mm - 40 mm
3.03.d CP Pillar Cock for Wash Basin - # CQT-23021 Jaquar, India ½" - -
3.03.e CP Regulating Valves CP Regulating Valve - # CQT-23059 Jaquar, India ½" - ½"
Long Thread with CP Wall Flange for Water
Feeder Pipe Line
3.03.f Flexible Braided Connector Tube with Nut & 450 mm long # ALD-805B Jaquar, India ½" - ½"
Washer
3.03.g CP Hand Towel Rail for Wash Basin 300 mm long # ACN-1101N Jaquar, India - - -
3.03.h CP Soap Dish - # ACN-1131N Jaquar, India - - -
3.03.i Bath Room Accessories for WC (for the Persons with Physical Limitations):
a. Drop Down Support Arm Type: 'SA-1' having:
- A Pair of ABS / Stainless Steel Foldable Hinged 600 mm long # C8153 Parryware, India - - -
Arms (Drop Down Support Arm)
4.00 Hand Wash Trough (HWT) Set:
4.01 Type: 'HWT-1' consisting of:
4.01.a Rectangular Masonry Hand Wash Trough (HWT) Local Fabricated (Civil Work) as per Drawing
(as per Drawing) having 1¼" dia outlet for Waste
Coupling
PA G E | 16 4
4.01.b CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange x 2 - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
sets Parryware, India
4.01.c CP Bottle Trap, 32 mm size with Wall 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼"
4.01.d CP Full Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9911A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
4.01.e CP Towel Hook x 2 - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
4.01.f CP Soap Dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, - - -
India
4.02 Type: 'HWT-2' consisting of:
4.02.a Rectangular Masonry Hand Wash Trough (HWT) Local Fabricated (Civil Work) as per Drawing
(as per Drawing) having 1¼" dia outlet for Waste
Coupling
4.02.b CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange x 3 - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
4.02.d CP Full Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9911A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
4.02.e CP Towel Hook x 3 - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
4.02.f CP Soap Dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, - - -
India
5.00 Urinal Set:
5.01 Type: 'UR-1' consisting of:
5.01.a White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Wall 305 x 305 x Flat Back Parryware, India ½" - 1¼"
Mounted Flat Back Urinal Basin having Top Inlet, 440 mm # C0501
CP anchorage Bolts/Brackets, etc.
5.01.b CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with - # G3453A1 "AMBER" ½" - ½"
5.01.c CP Flexible Connection Hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½"
5.01.d CP Bottle Trap, 32 mm size with Wall 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼"
PA G E | 16 5
6.00 Shower Unit Set:

6.01 Type: 'SH-1' consisting of:
6.01.a CP Concealed Valve for Head Shower etc - # G3411A1 "AMBER" ½" - ½"
Parryware, India
6.01.b CP Head Shower with CP Short Arm and CP dia 105 mm # T9901A1 + Parryware, India ½" - -
Wall Flange G0132A1
6.01.c CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange x 2 - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
6.01.d CP Robe Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
6.01.e CP Soap Dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, - - -
India
6.02 Type: 'BT-1' consisting of:
6.02a CP Bib Cock Long Body with CP Wall Flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
4set Parryware, India
6.02b CP Robe Hook 4set - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
6.02c CP Soap Dish 4 set - # T6003A1 Parryware, - - -
India
7.00 Stainless Steel Sink Set:
7.01 Type 'KS-1' (for Kitchen / Pantry) consisting of:
7.01.a Stainless Steel Sink Bowl only (450 x 400 x 200 450 x 400 x # C852099 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
mm deep) with Folded Edge & Gloss Finish 200 mm deep
7.01.b CP Full Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9911A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
7.01.d CP Sink Cock with Swivel Spout & CP Wall - # G3406A1 "AMBER" ½" - -
Flange Parryware, India
7.01.e CP Towel Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, - - -
India
PA G E | 16 6
8.00 Floor Drain Set:

8.01 Type: 'FD-1' consisting of:
8.01.a uPVC Nahani Trap 110 x 75 mm - Panchakanya 110 - 75
8.01.b Stainless Steel Anti Cockroach Floor Grating 5" size - Neelkantha, 5" - -
(Square or Round) with Frame India
9.00 Water Transfer Pumping Set:

9.01 Type: 'WP-1' consisting of:
9.01.a Electrical Multi Stage Centrifugal Pump of 0.75 0.75 kW (1 - Sharp, India NB 1" NB 1"
kW (1.0 HP) having capacity to discharge 35 Ipm HP), 220 V,
of clear water at 15 metre head (including Discharge 35
Suction + Delivery + Friction Loss of the Pipe) lpm at 15 m
with NB 25 mm (1") suction & delivery pipe head
sizes, etc
9.02 Type: 'WP-2' consisting of:
9.02.a Electrical Multi Stage Centrifugal Pump of 0.75 0.75 kW, 220 - Sharp, India NB 1" NB 1"
kW (1.0 HP) having capacity to discharge 35 Ipm V, Discharge
of clear water at 15 metre head (including 35 lpm at 15
Suction + Delivery + Friction Loss of the Pipe) m head
with NB 25 mm (1") suction & delivery pipe
sizes, etc
9.02.b Water Level Control Electronic Float Switch to for 0.75 kW (1 - Ram - -
control the Water Level of Ground Tank and HP), 220 V Lakhemaru,
Over Head Tank Pump Nepal
10.00 Over Head Water Storage Tank:
10.01 Type: 'WT-1' consisting of:
10.01.a Molded High Density Polyethylene Water 500 lts - Hilltake / - - -
Storage Tank having Lockable Cover and Nepatop, Nepal
necessary connection for Inlets, Out lets & Drain
Pipe line, etc (500 lts capacity)
11.01 Waste storage bins Set:
11.01.a Supply of 300 liter capacity 3 Nos. Color coded 300 lts - Hilltake / - - -
waste storage bins Nepatop, Nepal
PA G E | 16 7
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S S E CT I ON E S- 0 1 0
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL
This general technical specification covers the general technical requirements for the
complete supply and installation of the electrical system for the project including all
necessary supervision, labor, tools, equipment and accessories, miscellaneous
materials, testing, and putting in acceptable operation of the electrical system. The
electrical system shall be implied as the works related to lights, power sockets, fans,
telephone sockets, air-conditioning system, supply intake system, power cables etc.
Abbreviation used:
LT - Low Tension
HT - High Tension
MDB - Main Distribution Board
DB - Distribution Board
kV - Kilo Volt
kVA - Kilo Volt Amp
kA - Kilo Amp
PVC - Poly Vinyl Chloride
SWG - Standard Wire Gauge (British)
IS - Indian Standard
TPN - Three Phase Neutral
DP - Double Pole
MCB - Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
PA G E | 1 68
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S G E N E R A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
2. SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall supply and install all the electrical system works as per BOQ
complete with all accessories including materials, fixtures, electrical equipment and
appliances etc.
All equipment shall be complete and operative in all details and shall be left in a
satisfactory working condition.
The miscellaneous materials include, but are not limited to, all conduit wires, sub
distribution boards, junction boxes, fittings, supports, main distribution panel, cables,
metal clad switch fuse unit, fans, call-bells, and other accessories required for the
complete installation and satisfactory operation of the lighting system.
The Contractor shall perform the following work in addition to furnishing and delivering
of the equipment, materials and accessories:
Assembling at the site
a. Erection and complete installation
b. Testing of all equipment
c. Commissioning of all equipment prior to trial operation
d. Trial operation and all necessary adjustments prior to initial operation.
e. Obtaining Owner's/Engineer's approval and written acceptance for satisfactory
operation.
3. REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Workmanship:
All work shall be done in a first-class, neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics
skilled in the trade involved. They shall rectify then and there the defects pointed out by
the Engineer during the progress of work. The work shall be carried out in the best
workmanship and any defect or minor changes in design/construction if pointed out shall
be carried out by the contractor without any extra charges.
3.1.2 Materials:
All materials shall be new, of the best of their several kinds, and without imperfections
and blemishes. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these units shall be of same manufacturer. Materials which are defective or damaged
during the progress of work shall be replaced or repaired in approved manner at the
expense of the contractor.
3.1.3 Quantities:
All quantities mentioned in the bill of quantities are close to actual quantities and the
contractor will get paid according to measurement of actual work. The schedule of
quantities is liable to alteration by deletion or addition as required.
3.1.4 Rates:
The rate quoted in the tender shall include all charges of materials, installation, testing,
commissioning, labor, tools and equipment, auxiliary materials required to complete the
particular item of work, shed for material store, transferring all material from place of
availability to the site, all taxes, contingencies, breakage, wastage and maintenance of
installation for one year. The rate in the original contract shall determine the values of
the extra work where such extra work is of a similar nature and has been executed
PA G E | 1 69
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR E L E CT RI CAL W OR K S G E N E R AL S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
under similar conditions. Wherever the extra work is not of a similar nature, the rate for
the same shall be determined prior to the execution of work and established on the
approval of the Clint after recommendation by the Consultant.
3.1.5 Drawings:
The Drawings provided are design Drawings and generally are diagrammatic. They do
not show offsets, bends, pull box, which may be required for the installation. The
Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as possible and shall provide necessary
bends, pull box etc. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval detailed shop
Drawings of all installations not detailed on the Drawings provided. Some modification in
design, drawing can be done during the construction time in order to overcome practical
difficulties, provided the modification is approved by the Project Engineer. Prior to
commencing the electrical works, the Contractor shall provide to the Project Engineer a
set of drawings to the scale 1:50 showing detailed conduit layout and wiring drawings
showing all details such as the route and size of the duct, number and size of cables in
the conduit, location of outlet boxes, openings or duct outlets in civil works if required
etc. This Drawing shall be prepared in complete coordination with and understanding of
the civil and architectural works which will actually be undertaken. The Drawing shall be
immediately architect modified and approved if any changes in design are undertaken
and a record of such amendments shall be kept. A set of the up-dated and approved
Drawings shall be available at the site at all times for inspection by the Project Engineer.
Shop drawing: The work shall be carried in accordance with the drawing enclosed with
the tender and also in accordance with modification there to from time to time approved
by the Engineer. The contractor shall prepare the detail shop drawings of the following
items and get approval from the consultant before manufacturing/fabricating/installing of
the items.
 Detail of main distribution boards & sub-distribution boards.
 The run of various main & sub-main cables
Site Condition:
The equipment and materials to be installed should be suitable for the site conditions. It
is estimated that the maximum temperature at site will be 48 degree centigrade.
3.1.6 Cutting and Patching:

Cutting and patching required for the proper installation and completion of works
including plastering, masonry work, concrete work and painting shall be done by the
contractor himself and skilled labor shall be provided for the same.
3.1.7 Sample:
Prior to commencing procurement, the Contractor shall submit for approval technical
description, related catalogue/brochures and a sample item each of all cable, conduit,
accessories, switches, power outlets, lamps, fluorescent tubes, fixtures etc. which are to
be procured and installed.
3.1.8 Coordination with Civil and other Contractors:

Whatever recessed electrical fittings are required to be installed, the electrical contractor
shall be responsible or informing the civil contractor to keep necessary recesses in the
slab and in the false ceiling.
PAGE | 170
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR E L E CT RI CAL W OR K S SE CT I O N- E S- 0 2 0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. CODES & STANDARDS
Equipment supplied and the construction work shall conform to the relevant IS (IS:732 -
Code of Practice of Electrical Wiring Installation - System voltage not exceeding 650 V),
BS, DIN and the latest National Code of Practice published by HMG/N, Ministry of
Water Resources. Notwithstanding the stipulation of above Standards, local electrical
codes for electrical services in buildings, where such exist Code (Nepal Standard) shall
also be followed. Adequate consideration shall be given to compliance of the equipment
and works with local environmental conditions such as temperature, altitude, humidity,
duct, vermin, attitude of personnel who will occupy the premises etc.
2. RELEVANT STANDARDS
Following Specifications and Codes or their latest revision shall apply under all
circumstances.
Low Voltage Moulded Case Circuit Breaker - IS 2516, 1977
Transformer - IS 2026, 1962
Earthing - IS 3043, 1966
Wiring installation - IS 732, 1963
PVC Cable - IS 1554, 1964
Distribution boards - IS 2675, 1966
3. STANDARD MAKE
The standard make of the light fixtures, switch, socket, circuit breaker etc shall be as
indicated below or equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
MCCB Legrand/ Siemens/ L&T
MCB Legrand/Siemens/ L&T
Wiring cable Nepalese cable with NS Mark
Light switch Unbreakable Legrand Modular
Switch socket Unbreakable Legrand Modular
PAGE | 171
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR E L E CT RI CAL W OR K S T E C H N I C AL S P E C I F I C AT I O N
Telephone socket / LAN socket Honeywell/Siemens or

Equivalent
Light fixtures Philips
Incandescent light fixtures Philips
Power Cable Nepalese cable with NS Mark
Samples of the items whose standard make are not indicated shall be submitted and get
approved by the consultant before installation
4. COLOR CODE
Color codlings, as per internationally accepted rule, shall be followed for phases
(Red/Yellow/Blue), neutral (Black) and earth wire (Green) everywhere, even including
inside the main panel board, distribution board, main switch.
5. TOOLS & APPLIANCES
The Contractor shall propose two complete, new and unused sets of all special tools
and gauges which will be required for normal operation and maintenance. The
Contractor shall furnish the list of tools and appliances and their prices under price
schedule of the tender document. To the greatest extent possible, the tools for each
specific operation shall be stored in a single, lockable, portable steel box suitably and
clearly marked for convenient identification.
6. PVC INSULATED ELECTRIC CABLES
6.1.1 General
The electric cable shall be of 650/1100 volt insulation grade armoured / unarmoured
power cables. The cables shall be used for mains supply, walkway lighting, garden
lighting or facade lighting etc. The cables shall be of 4, 3 1/2, 2 or 1 core copper
conductors for LT application and 3 core aluminum conductor for HT application.
6.1.2 Cable laying

The LT underground power cable and cable from transformer pole to MCP shall be laid
through a earth work trench of 1 m depth. The bottom of the trench shall be laid with a
layer of 4 inches dry sand and cable shall be laid through HDPE pipe over the sand,
then the cable shall be covered by dry sand again up to 4'' over the cable. Brick top
cover shall be provided before the trench is back-filled with earthwork. The earthwork
shall be well compact to give original finish of the ground surface. Wherever cable
crosses road or drains, or enters the building HDPE sleeves pipes (6 kg pressure) of
approved diameter shall be provided.
 The cables shall be so laid that they shall not interfere with underground
structures. All water pipes, sewerage lines or other underground structures
which come exposed by excavation shall be properly supported and
protected from injury until the filling has been rammed perfectly in places and
around them.
 Cables routes shall be indicated in the as built drawing and shall be
submitted to the owner.
 If two or more cables are laid in the same trench, cable shall be kept in
sufficient gap to avoid de-rating of the cable. All the cables following the
same routes shall be laid in the same trench. Cables shall not be allowed to
cross each other as far as possible.
PAGE | 172
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
6.1.3 Tests
Cable shall be tested for insulation resistance before and after installation. The
insulation resistance between each conductor and against earth shall be more than 20
M-ohm
7. MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
7.1.1 General
The LT main distribution board shall be suitable for alternating current 3-phase 4-wire
400/230V, 50 Hz supply. It shall be pad-mounted. All the incoming and outgoing feeders
shall have appropriate sizes of MCCB & MCB's mentioned as per BOQ. The board
shall also consist of CT's, voltmeter, ammeter, indicating lamp assembly, fuses with fuse
blocks, copper terminal blocks etc. It shall also in-house the copper earth terminal with
multi-way provisions.
7.1.2 Construction details

Material & Painting
The main panel board shall be fabricated of sheet steel of not less than 16 SWG
thickness. The steel sheet should undergo aciditation and phosphatation process before
two coats of red oxide primer are applied, then two final coats of enamel paint of
approved color shall be applied.
Type
The main panel board shall be of cubical type, indoor type, totally enclosed dust and
vermin proof suitable for pad mounting. The steel members shall be welded together to
form a rigid self-supporting structure. The board shall be dead front type. All switches,
circuit breakers, etc. shall be operable from the front. Ample room shall be provided for
the wiring. It shall be designed to facilitate cable entry from bottom. Removable plates
shall be furnished with compression type cable glands to make entry dust-tight and no
weight is transferred on the terminal.
PA G E | 1 73
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR E L E CT RI CAL W OR K S T E C H N I C AL S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
Clearance
The minimum clearance of the power terminal lug from the bottom plate shall be
maintained as 200 mm. The minimum gap between two MCCB shall be 40mm.
Arrangement shall be made at the bottom of the control panel for receiving incoming
cable. Space for outgoing cables shall be properly designed as per requirement.
7.1.3 Bus Bar

Material and Size
The bus bar shall be made from highly conductive electrolytically pure copper bar strips
of sufficient cross sectional area so that maximum current density of 1.2 amp per sq.
mm. shall not be exceeded. The neutral bus bar shall not be less than 50% of the phase
bus cross section. The main bus bars shall be single length without joint up to the
incomer MCCB. The bus bars shall be sufficiently supported by insulator so that
insulation resistance shall not be less than 20 mega ohm.
Supports
The bus bar shall be carried on either bus bar insulators or other insulating materials
and the supports shall be sufficiently closed together to prevent bus bar sag and
enabling the bus bar chamber to withstand the effects of "Short Circuit" current.
The interconnection of cable to the bus bars, MCCB shall be done with heavy-duty
crimping type chromium plated copper double compression type cable shoe of suitable
size. The connections from the main bus bars to the incoming as well as outgoing
MCCBs shall be done by copper strips having sufficient cross-section.
All the contact surfaces in copper bus bars and strips shall have coating of silver by
electroplating. All the outgoing MCCB shall be marked by the tag covered by
transparent PVC pocket permanently fixed on the inner cover. The bus bars shall
be covered by heat shrinkable PVC sleeve and the bus bar chamber shall be covered
by a protecting transparent acrylic sheet.
7.1.4 Circuit breakers

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
General:
The molded case circuit breaker shall be Triple Pole and of panel mounting type. It shall
have all the live parts enclosed in a molded case and all contacts shall be silver-plated.
The breaker shall be trip free and with quick-make/break operating mechanism. It shall
be provided with magnetic short circuit protection and thermal overload device. It shall
have a common trip, causing an overload on one pole to trip all other poles.
Operation:
The circuit breaker shall be of inverse time and instantaneous trip type, with static trip
release. A push trip shall be provided on the cover to test the MCCB mechanically. The
'on', 'off' and 'trip' positions shall be clearly marked on the enclosure.
Rating:
The MCCBs shall have a breaking capacity as indicated in the BOQ at 400 volts for
incoming and outgoing circuits. The circuit breaker shall be operated by a toggle type
handle and shall have a quick make, quick break trip free mechanism.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

General:
PAGE | 174
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
The miniature circuit breaker shall be magnetic short circuit and thermal overload trip
low voltage automatic circuit breaker. Miniature circuit breaker shall have short circuit
breaking capacity of 9kA or higher. The body of circuit breaker shall be made of
fiberglass reinforced nylon pouring. The mechanism of the MCB shall be trip free also it
shall ensure opening of contacts under fault condition even if the operating knob is held
in `ON' position. In case of multiple units of MCB's, tripping of one pole should
automatically open the other poles.
7.1.5 Accessories
The separate chamber of the main panel board shall consist of the accessories:
 Voltmeter (0-500 Volt)
 Ammeter with selector switch
 Indicating lamps
 Fuse blocks
The CT's shall be in-housed in the bus bar chamber. The CT's shall be plain ring type
with round windows. It shall be wound with the best non-ageing material. The windings
of ring transformer shall be evenly distributed around the core. The cores of current
transformers shall be either silicon steel stamping, grain oriented steels or high
permeability alloys. The ratings and features for CT's are:
 rated voltage: 400 Volt
 maximum system voltage : 660 Volt
 rated frequency: 50 Hz
 rated secondary output: 5 Amp
 rated output: 10 VA
 accuracy class: BM refer to BS 81
 rated short time current (thermal,1 sec): 40 x In A
 rated continuous thermal current: 1.2 x In A
 polarity: subtractive
 applicable standard: BS 81 and BS 2046, IEC, or
7.1.6 Tests
Routine tests of main panel board shall be conducted in accordance with IS
specifications. Type test certificates and results, as per relevant IS specification for the
main panel board shall be furnished. The panel board shall be completely assembled,
wired adjusted and tested for operation under simulated conditions to ensure
correctness of wiring and proper functioning of all equipment. All component parts such
as MCCB, MCB's, meters, etc. shall be tested in accordance with relevant IS
specifications. Type test result of identical equipment shall be acceptable.
7.1.7 Installation
 A trench of appropriate dimension shall be made to lead the cable from the
bottom of panel board. Sufficient space shall be provided to avoid sharp bending
and for easy connection.
 The main panel board shall be ground mounted with all necessary accessories.
PA G E | 1 75
S P E CI FI C AT I O NS F OR E L E CT RI CAL W OR K S T E C H N I C AL S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
 All the outgoing feeders shall be brought out from the top of the board.
Necessarily dust and other foreign particles shall not enter into the board from
the holes.
 Interior wiring should be neat and handy.
 The location of the main panel board shall be in the ground floor and for specific
location the site engineer shall be consulted.
7.1.8 Drawing and Documents
The drawings in general are diagrammatic only and whilst every effort is made to show
the full extent of the work, proper allowance must be made when measuring from these
drawings to allow for rises and falls in the runs.
The Contractor will be held responsible for the accuracy of all measurements and for the
quantities of materials required in connection with the work. Any discrepancies must be
referred to the Consultants before submitting a tender, and claims later for extra
payment on account of misinterpretation of the specification or drawings will not be
allowed.
The following drawing with details shall be furnished along with the tender: Drawing of
the main panel board with:
 space required in the front and back
 power cable entry/exit points
 bus bar clearance between phase to phase and phase to neutral
 configuration of bus bars
 location of MCCB and MCB's
 compartments for metering/indicating accessories
PAGE | 176
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S S EC T I ON - E S - 0 3 0
DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1. GENERAL
The low-tension distribution board shall be suitable for alternating current 3-phase
4-wire 400/230 V, 50 Hz and 1-phase 230 V supply. For the line isolation and circuit
protection MCB's shall be employed. All the distribution boards shall be flush mounted.
2. CONSTRUCTION
Distribution board shall be made with 16 SWG mild steel-sheet cubical, concealed
mounting with double cover having openable hinges and locking arrangement. The mild
steel sheet shall be painted with two coats of red oxide primer, and the two final coats of
enamel of approved color. The bus bar used shall be made from highly conductive
electrolytically pure copper bar strips of sufficient cross sectional area so that maximum
current density of 1.2 Amp/sq mm shall not be exceeded. Neutral bus bar shall not be
less than 50 % of the phase bus cross section. The interconnection of cable inside SDB
shall be done with crimping type cable shoe of appropriate size. The incomer MCCB
shall have breaking capacity as indicated in the BOQ at 400 volts and the outgoing
MCBs shall have breaking capacity of 9 kA or higher at 230 volts. All the outgoing MCB
shall be properly marked on the inner cover.
PA G E | 1 77
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S S EC T I ON - E S - 0 4 0
WIRING & ACCESSORIES
1. GENERAL
The scope of this specification is the design and constructional aspects of electrical
wiring including the accessories. Wiring for lights, convenience outlets, fans, call bells,
telephones, etc. shall be carried out by distribution and looping tem as shown in the
electrical drawings. Accessories shall be of best quality.
No alteration which shall affect the structural building shall be done unless sanction of
the site-engineer in charge. All chassis, holes etc required in connection with the
electrical works shall be provided when the building is in progress.
2. WIRES
All the wiring conductors hall be of soft drawn annealed copper with PVC insulation
rated for 600 Volts. The sizes of the wires shall as per following:
 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire for light circuit

 7/22 sq.mm insulated copper wire for power socket wiring
 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire for earth wire along with the above wiring.
o All wiring conductors shall be single length without joint except in the
junction box. No cable joint shall be allowed in the pull box.
o PVC insulated wire of different colors shall be used so that phases and neutral
wires can be distinguished.
3. WIRING AND CONDUITING
Circuit conductors shall extend to the outlets shown. Circuiting basically shall be as
shown in the electrical drawings provided. An arrow indicating to sub-distribution board is
a complete circuit i.e. consisting of one phase conductor, one neutral conductor and one
earthing. .
PA G E | 1 78
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S W I R I N G A N D AC C E S S O R I E S
conductor with color codes (if necessary), in a suitable conduit with wire sizes defined
by the type of circuits.
Request for deviations in methods of circuiting and conduit branch circuit distribution
shall be submitted in shop drawings for approval to the engineer. The capacity of circuits
shall be such that a light circuit shall not have the load more than 1000 watts and a
power circuit shall not have more than three points i.e. 3000 watts unless otherwise
specified.
 All wiring and conducting of cable shall be concealed inside ceiling slab and wall.
 All the wiring conductors shall be of soft drawn annealed copper with PVC
insulation rated for 600 Volts. The cable shall be drawn in HDPE conduits of size
mentioned in the bill of quantity. The minimum wall thickness of HDPE conduit
shall be 2 mm.
 Maximum 4 nos of 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire along with an earth wire
shall be allowed through a 16 mm internal dia PVC conduit and maximum of 2
nos 7/22 PVC insulated copper wire along with an earth wire shall be
allowed through a 16-mm internal dia PVC conduit.
 All the PVC conduits shall be single lengths without joint except in the junction
box and pull-box. Single conduit length above 15m shall be provided with
a conveniently located pull-box. Pull-box also shall be provided at the sharp
bending of conduit.
 The outlet box for light point shall be made of rigid HDPE and the 16mm internal
dia conduit shall be tightly fixed to this box.
 All the wiring conductors shall be single length without joint except in the
junction box. No cable joint shall be allowed in the pull box.
4. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
4.1.1 Outlet Box:

The outlet box for light point shall be made of rigid PVC and the 16mm internal dia
conduit shall be tightly fixed to this box.
4.1.2 Junction box;

Junction box for branch circuit shall not be less than 6"4"2" made of 18 SWG GI metal
sheet. The box shall be installed 180 mm below the ceiling / RCC beam and shall be
covered by 6"4" MS plate (18 SWG) with enamel of color matching with the wall.
4.1.3 Metal Box:

The metal box for switch and socket shall be made of 18 SWG GI sheet.
5. INSTALLATION
Switches shall be fixed at the wall 1.5 m above the finished floor and at the locations
shown in the drawings.
Power, telephone and call-bell sockets shall be fixed at the walls 20 cm above the
finished floor and they shall be as shown in the drawings.
PA G E | 1 79
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
1. GENERAL
This specification shall cover the lighting fixtures and the lamps including all necessary
accessories. The contractor shall furnish and install all the fixtures with lamps and
accessories as per following specifications and drawings. The location of the fixture
shall be as per electrical layout plan drawings and as per the instruction of the Engineer.
The quality of the materials and installation shall be up to the satisfaction of the
supervisor in charge.
Fixture shall be provided on ceilings, walls carefully aligned and leveled. Adequacy of
support system and alignment shall be approved. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time
of final completion of work; every item shall be in proper working order. Fixtures shall be
protected from dirt, dust, paint, debris, etc.
Manufacture's catalogue number and/or description in the "Fixture Schedule" shall
establish quality, style, finish etc; similar fixture, which shall meet the exact specification,
or quality features and alike appearance shall be submitted for prior approval.
2. LIGHTING FIXTURE GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Fitting shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation under tropical climate. All
outdoor fittings shall be weatherproof and rainproof type. - The fittings shall be
designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including cleaning, replacement of
lamps/starters etc.
Connections between different components shall be made in such a way that they will
not work loose by small vibration. For each type fluorescent type and mercury type of
lightning fitting the contractor shall supply the utilization factor to indicate the proportion
of the light emitted by the bare lamps which falls on the working plane.
All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps suitable for operation on a supply
voltage and the variation in supply voltage up to +/- 10%. Normal supply voltage shall be
3 phase, four wire 400/230 volt 50HZ neutral solidly grounded system.
The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise. The
temperature rise above the ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the relevant
standards. All mercury vapor lamp fittings shall be complete with accessories like lamps,
ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors, starters wherever applicable etc. These
shall be mounted as far as possible in the fitting assembly only. If these cannot be
accommodated inside then a separate metal enclosed box shall be included to
accommodate the accessories and in addition with a fuse and a terminal block suitable
for loop-in, loop-out connections. Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with outdoor
type weatherproof box.
PAGE | 180
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S S EC T I ON - E S - 0 6 0
EARTHING
GI rod grid earthing shall be carried out as per drawing with 2m long 50mm dia GI solid
rod electrodes buried vertically with their tops 1m below the general ground level.
50mm4mm GI strip with welded joint shall be used for the interconnection of electrodes
and 25mm3mm GI strip shall be used to connect the grounding grid to the equipment.
The earthing grid should be at least 2 meters away from the building foundation. The
earth resistance in no case shall exceed 10 Ohms. Contractor shall be responsible to
bring down the value of earth resistance in case measured value comes more than 10
Ohms.
Plate earthing shall be made of 600mm600mm3mm copper plate buried vertically 1.5
m below the general ground level. 10 SWG bare copper wire shall be used to connect
the plate and the equipment. The 10 SWG bare copper wire shall be connected to the
plate by heat joint. Provision of watering chamber shall be provide as per drawing.
Separate earthing electrode shall be provided for the following system and equipment:
 Transformer Neutral
 Transformer body
 DG body
 DG neutral
 Main control Panel
PA G E | 1 81
STEEL TUBULAR POLES
The steel tubular poles for LT lines and HT lines shall confirm to IS 2713 (Part I and II)
1980. The poles shall be swaged type and made from steel having breaking load of 451
Kg. The dimension of the pole shall be as described below. The pole shall be complete
with a cast iron, beset type cap with 3 Nos. of equally spaced screws. The poles shall be
complete with 6 mm thick 300 mm x 300 mm mild steel base plate welded at the larger
end. The poles shall be painted throughout inside with a bituminous preservative
compound and outside shall be painted with a coat of zinc chromate primer and two
coats of aluminum paint. At the bottom of the pole 2 m coal tar vanish shall be painted
over the outer surface.
Dimension of 9m high steel tubular pole:

Bottom section - 127 mm outer dia, 4.5 mm thick, 5 m length
Middle section - 108 mm outer dia, 3.65 mm thick, 2 m length
Top Section - 76 mm outer dia, 3.25 mm thick, 2 m length
Dimension of 11m high steel tubular pole:

Bottom section - 165.1 mm outer dia, 5.4 mm thick, 5.6 m length.
Middle section - 139.7 mm outer dia, 4.4 mm thick, 2.7 m length
Top Section - 114.3 mm outer dia, 3.65 mm thick, 2.7 m length
PAGE | 182
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S F O R E L E C T R I C AL W O R K S S EC T I ON - E S - 0 8 0 0
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
All the items of work shall be measured in the unit specified in the BOQ.
 A set shall be considered as a complete set of the item of work described in the
BOQ including all the necessary fixing accessories to complete that item of work.
 A light point wiring includes the cost of HDPE conduit, wire, junction box, pull
box, other fixing accessories to complete the wiring from DB to a light point via
junction box and switch. A light fixture set shall be counted as a point, which
shall include the wiring to junction box and switch. Junction box and switch shall
not be counted as a point wiring.
 A power socket point wiring includes the cost of PVC conduit, wire, junction box,
pull box, other fixing accessories to complete the wiring from DB to a socket
point via pull box. A power socket shall be counted as a point.
 All the main cables, except point wiring, shall be running meter.
PA G E | 1 83

Annex - A - Technical Specifications - RFSL PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Annex - A - Technical Specifications - RFSL PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNEX -A

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS -----------------------------------------PAGE 1 - 42

B. SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURNITURE WORKS ------------------PAGE 43 - 50

C. SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS --------------------------- PAGE 51-128

D. SPECIFICATIONS FOR SANITARY & ELECTRICAL WORKS-----PAGE 129-183

Section GR-010: Scope of the Work ---------------------------------------------------------------------Page 1

Section GR-020: Employer Supplied Data and Information -------------------------------------Page 2-3

Section GR-030: Access, Transportation and Storage ------------------------------------------- Page 4-5

Section GR-040: Site Facilities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 6-7

Section GR-050: Contractor’s Submittals--------------------------------------------------------------Page 8-12

Section GR-060: Pre-construction Works -------------------------------------------------------------Page 13-14

Section GR-070: Layout of Work and Survey --------------------------------------------------------Page 15-16

Section GR-080: Quality Control -------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 17-22

Section GR-090: Health and Safety ----------------------------------------------------------------------Page 23-35

Section GR-110: Site Meetings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Page 40

2. SCOPE OF WORK (GENERAL)

EMPLOYER-SUPPLIED DATA AND INFORMATION

2. DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS

Whenever any material is specified in the Specifications or on the Drawings by patent or

4. STANDARDS, CODES OR DESIGNATIONS

Unless specifically provided otherwise, all references in the Contract to standards,

ACCESS, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

3. PACKAGING AND SHIPPING

4. SITE HANDLING AND STORAGE

1. OFFICE, LUNCHROOM AND RESIDENTIAL FACILITIES

6. FIRST AID FACILITIES

9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3. CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN CALCULATIONS

4. MATERIALS, DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

6. TESTS AND TEST REPORT

6.2 Tests on Plants

6.3 Tests on Materials

6.4 Shop or Mill Orders

6.5 Test Reports

7. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS

8. INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

assembling, disassembling, maintaining and operating the equipment. The manual, as a

10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4. PROVISIONS FOR OCCUPIED AREAS OF SITE OR BUILDINGS

5. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

6. CONDITION SURVEY OF ADJOINING PROPERTY

The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Engineer and owners/occupants of

8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

LAYOUT OF WORK AND SURVEY

3. SURVEY POINT MARKERS

4. SURVEY EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL

5. FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS

6. USE BY THE ENGINEER

8. SURVEY OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

The Contractor shall conduct survey, measurement and observations of existing

9. MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENTS

2.1 General Description

2.2 Quality Control Program

e. Documentation of quality control activities.

3. QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

The Contractor’s QCP shall be implemented by the establishment of a separate quality

Quality Control Technicians

6. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING PLAN

8. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS

11. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

HEALTH AND SAFETY

1.1 Responsibility for Safety